39311129-modeling-160-enu

260
 Tekla Structures Modelin g Manual Product version 16.0 December 2009 © 2010 Tekla Corporation

Upload: muhammad-faisal-khan

Post on 06-Jul-2015

289 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 1/260

 

Tekla Structures

Modeling Manual

Product version 16.0

December 2009

© 2010 Tekla Corporation

Page 2: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 2/260

 

© 2010 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.

This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of thisSoftware Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certainwarranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, definespermitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All informationset forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License

Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does notguarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to makechanges and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.

In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorizedreproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil andcriminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.

Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xroad, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarksor trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other productand company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to athird-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third partyand disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.

Portions of this software:

D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2008 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved.

EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.

XML parser © 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.

Project Data Control Library © 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved.

DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rightsreserved.

FlexNet Copyright © 2006 Flexera Software Limited. All Rights Reserved. This product contains proprietary andconfidential technology provided by and owned by Flexera Software Limited Of Schaumburg, IL, USA. Any use,copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in anyform or by any means without the prior express written permission of Flexera Software Limited is strictly prohibited.Except where expressly provided by Flexera Software Limited in writing, possession of this technology shall not be

construed to confer any license or rights under any of Flexera Software´s intellectual property rights, whether byestoppel, implication, or otherwise.

The software is protected by U.S. Patent 7,302,368. Also elements of the software described in this Manual may bethe subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries including U.S. patentapplications 2004031231, 2004267695, 2005285881, 2006000484 and 200613639.

Page 3: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 3/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 3

Conventions used in this guide

Typographicalconventions

The following typographical conventions are used in this guide:

Noteboxes The following types of noteboxes are used in this guide:

Font Usage

Bold Any text that you see in the user interface appears in bold. This fontis used, for example, for window and dialog box titles, box andbutton names, and list items.

Italic bold  New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current contextfor the first time.

Monospace Extracts of program code, HTML, or other material that you wouldnormally edit in a text editor, appear in monospaced font.

This font is also used for file names and folder paths, and for anytext that you should type yourself.

A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doingthings.

A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It canalso point you to other information in this guide that you might finduseful.

You should always read very important notes and warnings, like thisone. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting yourtime.

This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that

is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers.

Page 4: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 4/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 4

Contents

Conventions used in this guide ........................................................................................................................... 3

1 Creat ing 3D Models ................................................................................. 15

1.1 What is a 3D model.............................................................................................................................. 15

1.2 Creating a new model........................................................................................................................... 16

1.3 Opening a model.................................................................................................................................. 17

1.4 Saving a model..................................................................................................................................... 17Saving a model with a different name or location............................................................................ 17

1.5 Model templates................................................................................................................................... 18

Creating a model template............................................................................................................... 18

2 Setting up the Workspace ...................................................................... 21

2.1 Screen layout........................................................................................................................................ 21

Changing the background color....................................................................................................... 23

Background color examples............................................................................................................. 23

2.2 Work area............................................................................................................................................. 25

Defining the work area..................................................................................................................... 26

Hiding the work area........................................................................................................................ 26

2.3 Work plane............................................................................................................................................ 27

Shifting the work plane..................................................................................................................... 27

Restoring the default work plane...................................................................................................... 28

Changing the color of the work plane grid........................................................................................ 28

2.4 Coordinate system................................................................................................................................ 28

2.5 Grids..................................................................................................................................................... 29

Creating a grid.................................................................................................................................. 30

Grid coordinates ........................................................................................................................ 30

Grid labels ................................................................................................................................. 31

Modifying a grid................................................................................................................................ 31

Deleting a grid.................................................................................................................................. 31

Changing the grid color.................................................................................................................... 31

Grid lines.......................................................................................................................................... 32

Creating a single grid line .......................................................................................................... 32

Modifying a single grid line ........................................................................................................ 33

Page 5: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 5/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 5

Deleting a single grid line .......................................................................................................... 33

2.6 Views.................................................................................................................................................... 33

Should I model in a 3D or plane view?............................................................................................. 34

Creating a view................................................................................................................................ 35

About naming views .................................................................................................................. 35View types ................................................................................................................................. 36

View planes ............................................................................................................................... 36

Moving a view plane .................................................................................................................. 37

Creating grid views .................................................................................................................... 38

Opening a view................................................................................................................................ 38

Modifying a view............................................................................................................................... 38

Deleting a view................................................................................................................................. 38

Switching between open views........................................................................................................ 39

Switching between 3D and plane view............................................................................................. 39

Refreshing views.............................................................................................................................. 39

Arranging views................................................................................................................................ 39

2.7 Construction objects............................................................................................................................. 40

Creating a construction plane.......................................................................................................... 40

Creating a construction line.............................................................................................................. 41

Creating a construction circle........................................................................................................... 41

2.8 Points.................................................................................................................................................... 42

Creating a point................................................................................................................................ 42

Importing points................................................................................................................................ 422.9 Reference models................................................................................................................................. 43

Inserting a reference model............................................................................................................. 44

Modifying reference model properties.............................................................................................. 44

Selecting a reference model............................................................................................................ 45

Hiding a reference model................................................................................................................. 45

Highlighting a reference model........................................................................................................ 45

Updating reference models.............................................................................................................. 45

Detecting changes in a reference model.......................................................................................... 45

Viewing reference model layers....................................................................................................... 46Reference model objects................................................................................................................. 47

Selecting a reference model object ........................................................................................... 48

Splitting a reference model into reference model objects .......................................................... 48

Supported DGN objects................................................................................................................... 48

3 Creating and Modifying Structures ........................................................ 51

3.1 Parts ..................................................................................................................................................... 51

Part types......................................................................................................................................... 52

Profiles............................................................................................................................................. 52

Page 6: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 6/260

 

6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Changing the profile of a part .................................................................................................... 52

Standard profiles ........................................................................................................................ 53

Parametric profiles ..................................................................................................................... 53

User-defined profiles .................................................................................................................. 53

Materials........................................................................................................................................... 54

Changing the material of a part ................................................................................................. 54

Colors............................................................................................................................................... 55

User-defined attributes..................................................................................................................... 55

Part labels ........................................................................................................................................ 56

Showing part labels in a view .................................................................................................... 56

3.2 Part position.......................................................................................................................................... 57

Moving a part using handles............................................................................................................ 57

Showing part reference lines in model views................................................................................... 58

Modifying the position of a part ........................................................................................................ 58

Position on the work plane ......................................................................................................... 59

Rotation ..................................................................................................................................... 59

Position depth ............................................................................................................................ 60

Vertical position ......................................................................................................................... 61

Horizontal position ..................................................................................................................... 62

End offsets ................................................................................................................................. 63

Levels ........................................................................................................................................ 64

Bending ...................................................................................................................................... 65

3.3 Steel parts............................................................................................................................................. 66

Creating a steel column.................................................................................................................... 66

Creating a steel beam...................................................................................................................... 67

Creating a steel polybeam................................................................................................................ 67

Creating a curved beam................................................................................................................... 68

Creating a contour plate................................................................................................................... 68

Creating a round contour plate .................................................................................................. 69

Creating an orthogonal beam........................................................................................................... 69

Creating a twin profile....................................................................................................................... 70

3.4 Assemblies............................................................................................................................................ 70

Creating an assembly....................................................................................................................... 71

Creating a sub-assembly ........................................................................................................... 71

Using bolts to create assemblies ............................................................................................... 71

Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly ....................................................................... 72

Using welds to create assemblies ............................................................................................. 72

Welding sub-assemblies to an existing assembly ..................................................................... 72

Adding objects to assemblies........................................................................................................... 73

Assembly hierarchy ................................................................................................................... 73

Adding parts to an assembly ..................................................................................................... 74

Creating a nested assembly ...................................................................................................... 74

Page 7: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 7/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 7

Joining assemblies .................................................................................................................... 75

Changing the assembly main part ............................................................................................. 75

Changing the main assembly .................................................................................................... 75

Removing objects from an assembly............................................................................................... 75

Highlighting objects in an assembly................................................................................................. 75

Exploding an assembly.................................................................................................................... 76

Assembly examples......................................................................................................................... 76

3.5 Concrete parts...................................................................................................................................... 77

Creating a pad footing...................................................................................................................... 78

Creating a strip footing..................................................................................................................... 78

Creating a concrete column............................................................................................................. 78

Creating a concrete beam................................................................................................................ 79

Creating a concrete polybeam......................................................................................................... 79

Creating a concrete slab.................................................................................................................. 80

Creating a round slab ................................................................................................................ 80

Creating a concrete panel................................................................................................................ 81

3.6 Cast units.............................................................................................................................................. 81

Creating a cast unit.......................................................................................................................... 82

Adding objects to cast units............................................................................................................. 82

Adding concrete objects to a cast unit ....................................................................................... 82

Adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit ............................................................................... 82

Changing the cast unit main part ............................................................................................... 82

Removing objects from a cast unit................................................................................................... 83

Highlighting objects in a cast unit..................................................................................................... 83

Exploding a cast unit........................................................................................................................ 83

Defining the cast unit type................................................................................................................ 83

Casting direction.............................................................................................................................. 84

Defining the casting direction of a part ...................................................................................... 84

Showing the top-in-form face .................................................................................................... 84

4 Detailing Structures ................................................................................ 85

4.1 Bolts...................................................................................................................................................... 85

Creating a bolt group........................................................................................................................ 86

Bolt group shape ....................................................................................................................... 86

Bolt group position ..................................................................................................................... 87

Bolt offsets ................................................................................................................................. 88

Creating a single bolt ....................................................................................................................... 88

Changing or adding bolted parts...................................................................................................... 88

4.2 Holes..................................................................................................................................................... 89

Creating round holes........................................................................................................................ 89

Creating slotted holes...................................................................................................................... 90

Page 8: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 8/260

 

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating oversized holes.................................................................................................................. 90

4.3 Welds.................................................................................................................................................... 91

Creating a weld between parts......................................................................................................... 91

Weld position ............................................................................................................................. 92

Weld size prefixes ...................................................................................................................... 93Creating a polygon weld................................................................................................................... 93

Creating a weld to a part .................................................................................................................. 94

Weld preparation.............................................................................................................................. 94

Manually preparing a part for welding ........................................................................................ 94

4.4 Surface treatment.................................................................................................................................. 95

Modifying surface treatment properties............................................................................................ 96

Adding surface treatment to parts.................................................................................................... 96

Adding surface treatment to a selected area ............................................................................. 97

Adding surface treatment to a part face ..................................................................................... 97Adding surface treatment to all faces of a part .......................................................................... 97

Adding surface treatment to cut faces ....................................................................................... 97

Surface treatment on chamfered parts ...................................................................................... 98

Surface treatment on parts with openings and recesses ........................................................... 98

Creating new surface treatment options........................................................................................... 99

Tiled surface treatment................................................................................................................... 100

Creating new tile patterns ........................................................................................................ 100

Example pattern definition ....................................................................................................... 101

Tile pattern definitions .............................................................................................................. 103

Tile pattern elements ............................................................................................................... 104

4.5 Fine-tuning part shape........................................................................................................................ 104

Chamfers........................................................................................................................................ 104

Chamfering part corners .......................................................................................................... 105

Corner chamfer types and dimensions .................................................................................... 105

Polybeam chamfers ................................................................................................................. 106

Chamfering part edges ............................................................................................................ 107

Fittings............................................................................................................................................ 108

Creating a fitting ....................................................................................................................... 108

Cuts................................................................................................................................................ 109

Line cuts .................................................................................................................................. 109

Polygon cuts ............................................................................................................................ 109

Part cuts ................................................................................................................................... 110

Cutting parts with a line ........................................................................................................... 111

Cutting parts with a polygon .................................................................................................... 111

Cutting parts with another part ................................................................................................. 112

Modifying the shape of a polygon................................................................................................... 112

Warping concrete parts.................................................................................................................. 113

Warping a beam using deformation angles ............................................................................. 113

Page 9: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 9/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 9

Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfers ......................................................................... 113

Warping a Floor Bay (66) slab ................................................................................................. 114

Cambering parts............................................................................................................................. 115

Cambering a part ..................................................................................................................... 115

Shortening and lengthening parts.................................................................................................. 115

Shortening a part in drawings .................................................................................................. 116

Lengthening a part in drawings ............................................................................................... 116

4.6 Combining parts.................................................................................................................................. 116

Combining two parts into one......................................................................................................... 116

Attaching a part to another part...................................................................................................... 117

4.7 Splitting parts...................................................................................................................................... 117

Splitting a straight or curved part ................................................................................................... 118

Splitting a plate or slab................................................................................................................... 118

5 Examining the Model............................................................................. 119

5.1 Viewing the model.............................................................................................................................. 119

Zooming the model........................................................................................................................ 119

Modifying the zoom settings .................................................................................................... 120

Zooming with keyboard shortcuts ............................................................................................ 120

Zooming with Magnifier ........................................................................................................... 120

Rotating the model......................................................................................................................... 121

Moving the model........................................................................................................................... 122

Flying through the model................................................................................................................ 123Creating a clip plane...................................................................................................................... 124

Creating a screenshot.................................................................................................................... 124

Creating a screenshot in Windows Vista ................................................................................. 125

Saving a screenshot in bitmap format ..................................................................................... 125

Printing a screenshot ............................................................................................................... 125

5.2 Inquiring the model............................................................................................................................. 126

Inquiring object properties.............................................................................................................. 126

Object property report templates ............................................................................................. 126

Using the Custom Inquiry tool........................................................................................................ 126Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry tool ......................................................................... 127

Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool ................................................................................. 127

5.3 Showing and hiding objects................................................................................................................ 128

Defining which objects are displayed............................................................................................. 128

Representation options.................................................................................................................. 128

Hiding selected parts...................................................................................................................... 130

Hiding unselected parts.................................................................................................................. 131

Showing parts with exact lines....................................................................................................... 131

Showing and hiding assemblies..................................................................................................... 131

Page 10: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 10/260

 

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Showing and hiding components................................................................................................... 132

Object groups................................................................................................................................. 132

Creating an object group ......................................................................................................... 132

Copying an object group to another model .............................................................................. 133

Deleting an object group .......................................................................................................... 133

Object representation settings........................................................................................................ 133

Creating object representation settings ................................................................................... 134

Copying object representation settings to another model ........................................................ 135

Deleting object representation settings .................................................................................... 135

5.4 Visualizing project status..................................................................................................................... 135

Creating a visualization.................................................................................................................. 136

Copying visualization settings to another model............................................................................ 136

Deleting visualization settings........................................................................................................ 136

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project ................................................................ 136

Example: Defining an erection schedule ................................................................................. 137

Example: Creating object groups ............................................................................................. 137

Example: Creating object representation settings ................................................................... 138

Example: Creating visualization settings ................................................................................. 138

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule ............................................................................ 139

5.5 Checking the model............................................................................................................................ 142

Measuring objects.......................................................................................................................... 143

Measuring distances ................................................................................................................ 143

Measuring angles .................................................................................................................... 143

Measuring bolt spacing ............................................................................................................ 143

Detecting clashes........................................................................................................................... 144

Finding clashes in a model ...................................................................................................... 145

Clash Check Manager ............................................................................................................. 145

Defining a clash check clearance area for bolts ...................................................................... 148

Reverting to the old clash checking functionality ..................................................................... 149

Comparing parts or assemblies...................................................................................................... 149

Finding distant objects.................................................................................................................... 149

6 Numbering the Model ............................................................................ 1516.1 What is numbering.............................................................................................................................. 151

6.2 What affects numbering...................................................................................................................... 152

Identical parts................................................................................................................................. 152

Identical reinforcements................................................................................................................. 153

User-defined attributes in numbering............................................................................................. 153

6.3 Defining numbering series.................................................................................................................. 153

Planning your numbering series..................................................................................................... 154

Assigning a numbering series to a part.......................................................................................... 154

Page 11: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 11/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 11

Family numbers.............................................................................................................................. 155

Assigning family numbers ....................................................................................................... 155

Changing the family number of an object ................................................................................ 156

Overlapping numbering series....................................................................................................... 156

6.4 Numbering objects.............................................................................................................................. 156

Numbering assemblies and cast units ........................................................................................... 157

Assembly position numbers .................................................................................................... 157

Numbering reinforcements............................................................................................................. 157

Saving preliminary numbers........................................................................................................... 158

Control numbers............................................................................................................................. 158

Assigning control numbers to parts ......................................................................................... 159

Locking and unlocking control numbers .................................................................................. 159

Changing numbers......................................................................................................................... 159

Clearing numbers........................................................................................................................... 160

Creating a standard-part model ..................................................................................................... 160

6.5 Viewing the numbering history............................................................................................................ 161

6.6 Repairing numbering errors................................................................................................................ 161

6.7 Numbering examples.......................................................................................................................... 162

Example: Numbering identical beams............................................................................................ 162

Example: Using family numbers..................................................................................................... 163

Example: Numbering selected part types...................................................................................... 164

Example: Numbering parts in selected phases.............................................................................. 164

Example: Numbering settings during a project .............................................................................. 165

7   Advanced Modeling............................................................................... 167

7.1 Organizing the model.......................................................................................................................... 167

Creating logical areas.................................................................................................................... 168

Creating object type categories...................................................................................................... 169

Modifying logical areas and object type categories........................................................................ 169

Viewing logical areas and object type categories.......................................................................... 170

Deleting logical areas and object type categories.......................................................................... 171

7.2 Phases................................................................................................................................................ 171

Dividing the model into phases...................................................................................................... 171

Custom phase properties............................................................................................................... 171

7.3 Sequences.......................................................................................................................................... 172

Creating a sequence...................................................................................................................... 172

Adding parts to a sequence........................................................................................................... 173

Checking the sequence of a part ................................................................................................... 173

Modifying the sequence number of a part...................................................................................... 173

Deleting a sequence...................................................................................................................... 173

7.4 Lotting................................................................................................................................................. 174

Page 12: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 12/260

 

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating a lot.................................................................................................................................. 174

Adding parts to a lot ....................................................................................................................... 175

Removing parts from a lot.............................................................................................................. 175

Deleting a lot .................................................................................................................................. 175

7.5 Parametric modeling........................................................................................................................... 176

Parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures........................................................................... 176

7.6 Sketched cross sections..................................................................................................................... 181

Opening the cross section sketch editor ........................................................................................ 181

Sketch Browser ........................................................................................................................ 182

Variables .................................................................................................................................. 183

Sketching the outline of a cross section......................................................................................... 184

Sketching a polyline ................................................................................................................. 184

Sketching an arc ...................................................................................................................... 185

Sketching a circle ..................................................................................................................... 185Refining the shape of a sketched cross section............................................................................. 186

Adding a parallel constraint ..................................................................................................... 186

Adding a perpendicular constraint ........................................................................................... 187

Adding a coincident constraint ................................................................................................. 187

Adding a fixed constraint ......................................................................................................... 188

Adding a horizontal constraint ................................................................................................. 188

Adding a vertical constraint ...................................................................................................... 189

Deleting a constraint ................................................................................................................ 189

Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section............................................................................. 190

Adding a radial dimension to a sketch ..................................................................................... 190

Adding an angle dimension to a sketch ................................................................................... 191

Adding a dimension between two points in a sketch ............................................................... 191

Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch .............................................................................. 192

Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch .................................................................................. 192

Deleting a dimension from a sketch ......................................................................................... 193

Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section............................................................... 193

Part positioning planes ............................................................................................................ 193

Connection positioning planes ................................................................................................. 194

Showing and hiding positioning planes .................................................................................... 195

Moving positioning planes ....................................................................................................... 195

Moving positioning plane handles ............................................................................................ 196

Reverting to default positioning planes .................................................................................... 197

Checking a sketched cross section................................................................................................ 197

Saving a sketched cross section.................................................................................................... 198

Modifying a sketched cross section................................................................................................ 198

Modifying chamfers in a sketch ............................................................................................... 199

Setting the sketch thickness .................................................................................................... 199

Cross section extrusion types .................................................................................................. 200

Page 13: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 13/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 13

Using sketched cross sections in a model..................................................................................... 201

Creating an image of a sketched cross section ....................................................................... 201

Importing and exporting sketched cross sections.......................................................................... 202

Importing sketched cross sections .......................................................................................... 203

Exporting sketched cross sections .......................................................................................... 203

Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross section............................................................... 204

Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross section ....................................................................... 204

Example: Adding dimensions to the cross section .................................................................. 205

Example: Setting the cross section thickness ......................................................................... 206

Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross section ........................................................... 207

Example: Using the cross section in a model .......................................................................... 208

8 Modeling Settings.................................................................................. 211

8.1 General settings.................................................................................................................................. 211

Grid properties............................................................................................................................... 211

Grid line properties......................................................................................................................... 212

Point properties.............................................................................................................................. 212

Rotation settings............................................................................................................................ 213

Color settings................................................................................................................................. 213

Transparency settings.................................................................................................................... 214

Screenshot settings........................................................................................................................ 214

8.2 View settings....................................................................................................................................... 215

View properties.............................................................................................................................. 215Grid view properties....................................................................................................................... 215

Display settings.............................................................................................................................. 216

8.3 Part properties.................................................................................................................................... 217

Steel column properties................................................................................................................. 218

Steel beam properties.................................................................................................................... 218

Contour plate properties................................................................................................................. 219

Orthogonal beam properties.......................................................................................................... 220

Twin profile properties.................................................................................................................... 221

Pad footing properties.................................................................................................................... 222Strip footing properties................................................................................................................... 223

Concrete column properties........................................................................................................... 224

Concrete beam properties.............................................................................................................. 225

Concrete slab properties................................................................................................................ 225

Concrete panel properties.............................................................................................................. 226

8.4 Detail properties.................................................................................................................................. 227

Bolt properties................................................................................................................................ 227

Weld properties.............................................................................................................................. 229

Weld types..................................................................................................................................... 231

Page 14: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 14/260

 

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Corner chamfer properties............................................................................................................. 232

Edge chamfer properties................................................................................................................ 232

8.5 Numbering settings............................................................................................................................. 233

General numbering settings........................................................................................................... 233

Weld numbering settings................................................................................................................ 234Control number settings................................................................................................................. 235

9 Modeling Tips ........................................................................................ 237

9.1 General modeling tips......................................................................................................................... 237

Defining default part properties...................................................................................................... 237

Copying and moving efficiently....................................................................................................... 238

Modeling identical areas................................................................................................................. 238

Selecting values from the model.................................................................................................... 238

Activating an overlapping view....................................................................................................... 239Finding RGB values for colors........................................................................................................ 239

Right-hand rule............................................................................................................................... 239

Hiding cut lines in a view................................................................................................................ 240

Cutting efficiently............................................................................................................................ 240

Useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports.................................................................................. 241

9.2 Part positioning tips............................................................................................................................. 241

Modifying part length...................................................................................................................... 241

Creating horizontal parts................................................................................................................ 242

Optional ways of placing objects in a model .................................................................................. 242Positioning objects in a radial or circular pattern............................................................................ 242

Page 15: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 15/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 15

Creating 3D Models

1 Creating 3D Models

This section explains how to open, create, and save models in Tekla Structures.

Contents • What is a 3D model (p. 15)

• Creating a new model (p. 16)

• Opening a model (p. 17)

• Saving a model (p. 17)

• Model templates (p. 18)

1.1 What is a 3D model

Using Tekla Structures, you can create a real-life model of any structure. The 3D modelcontains all the information that is needed to manufacture and construct the structure,including:

• Geometry and dimensions

• Profiles and cross sections

• Connection types

• Materials

The 3D model is the single source of information for drawings and other outputs, such as

reports and NC data files. This ensures that the information in drawings and reports is alwaysup to date, as they react to modifications in the model.

Page 16: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 16/260

 

16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating 3D Models

See also Creating and Modifying Structures (p. 51)

1.2 Creating a new model

You need to create a model for each Tekla Structures project. This model contains all theinformation about the project. Each model is stored in its own folder in theTeklaStructuresModels folder.

To create a new model:

1. Click  File > New... or .

You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, TeklaStructures prompts you to save that model.

2. Define where to save the new model.

• To select a folder, click Browse.

• To save the model in a recently used model folder, use the Save in list box.

• To define the location manually, type the path in the Save in field, followed by the

\ character. Do not enter the model name in this field.

3. Type a unique name in the Model name field.

Do not use special characters (/ \ ; : | ).

4. Optional: In the Model template list box, select the template you want to use.

5. In the Model type list box, define whether the model may be used by one person orshared by many.

• Single-user: model will be used by one person.

• Multi-user: model is stored on a server and may be used by several people. Also

enter the name of the server in the Server field.

6. Click  OK.

Tekla Structures creates the model and opens the default model view.

See also Model templates (p. 18)

Multi-user mode

Page 17: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 17/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 17

Creating 3D Models

1.3 Opening a model

To open a Tekla Structures model:

1. Click  File > Open... or .You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, TeklaStructures prompts you to save that model.

2. In the Open dialog box, select the model.

• To open a recently used model, use the Model name list box.

• To open a recently used model folder, use the Look in list box.

• To search for models in another folder, click Browse...

3. Click  OK to open the model.

If no views are visible after you have opened a model, Tekla Structures prompts you toselect one.

See also Creating a new model (p. 16)

1.4 Saving a model

You should save your model regularly to avoid losing any work. Tekla Structures alsoautomatically saves your work at regular intervals.

To save a model, do one of the following:

• Click .

• Click  File > Save.

See also Saving a model with a different name or location (p. 17)

Saving in multi-user mode

Autosave

Saving a model with a different name or location

To save a copy of a model under a different name or in a different location:

1. Click  File > Save As...

2. In the Save as dialog box, browse to the folder where you want to save the model.

You can sort models by clicking the column titles.

When the models are sorted alphabetically by their names, you can usethe keyboard to select models. For example, when you type N, TeklaStructures selects the first model starting with an N.

The Autosave tool automatically saves your model and drawings at setintervals. To set the autosave interval, click Tools > Options >

Options... > General.

Page 18: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 18/260

 

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating 3D Models

3. In the Model name field, type a new name.

4. Click  OK.

Tekla Structures creates a new copy with a different name, but the original version of themodel remains intact.

See also Saving a model (p. 17)

1.5 Model templates

You can save the desired settings in a model and use that model as a template when you createnew models.

The location of model templates is defined by the advanced optionXS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY. For example, you can set this advanced optionto point to the same location as XS_FIRM. By default, the advanced option points to the folder..\Tekla

Structures\<version>\environments\default\model_templates\ .

Any model under the defined folder will be available as a model template if the fileTeklaStructuresModel.xml in the model folder contains the setting<IsTemplate>TRUE</IsTemplate>. The default value is FALSE.

You can create only single-user models with model templates. If you wish to create a multi-usermodel using a model template, create the model in single-user mode and then switch to multi-user mode.

See also Creating a model template (p. 18)

Switching between single-user and multi-user modes

Creating a model template

When you create a model template, always start by creating a new empty model. This isbecause old models cannot be completely cleaned and they might contain quite a lot of information even if you delete all objects from the model.

To create a model template:

1. Create a new model and give it a unique name.

For example, Steel framework.

2. Add the desired profiles, custom components, and so on, in the model.

3. Save and close the model.

4. Move the whole model folder in the location pointed by the advanced optionXS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY.

By default, the advanced option points to the folder ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\environments\default\model_templates\ .

5. In the new template model folder, open the TeklaStructuresModel.xml fileusing any standard text editor.

This section is for advanced users.

Page 19: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 19/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 19

Creating 3D Models

6. Set the IsTemplate element to TRUE.

7. Save the file.

See also Model templates (p. 18)

Do not edit the TeklaStructuresModels.xml file that is locatedin the TeklaStructuresModels folder or in the place pointed bythe advanced option XS_RUNPATH.

Page 20: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 20/260

 

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating 3D Models

Page 21: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 21/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 21

Setting up the Workspace

2 Setting up the Workspace

This section explains how to set up the workspace so that you can start modeling. It alsopresents some basic Tekla Structures vocabulary and concepts that are needed when workingwith 3D models.

Contents • Screen layout (p. 21)

• Work area (p. 25)

• Work plane (p. 27)

• Coordinate system (p. 28)

• Grids (p. 29)

• Views (p. 33)

• Construction objects (p. 40)

• Points (p. 42)

• Reference models (p. 43)

2.1 Screen layout

When you start Tekla Structures, a new window appears on the screen. Initially, most of themenu options and all the icons are gray indicating that they are inactive. When you open or

create a model, the icons and available menu options will become active.

Page 22: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 22/260

 

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

The following illustration identifies the various areas of the Tekla Structures modelinginterface:

See also Changing the background color (p. 23)

Status bar displays instructions, and the status of some settings

Snap settings control which points you can snap to and pick 

Select switches determine the selectable objects

Pull-down menus contain all the commands

Toolbars can be either docked or floating

Page 23: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 23/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 23

Setting up the Workspace

Changing the background color 

You can define the background color of model views using RGB values. You can control thecolor of each corner of the background separately.

To change the background color in rendered views:

1. Click  Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.2. Modify the background color using the following advanced options:

• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1

• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2

• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR3

• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR4

To use a single-colored background, set the same value for all four corners of thebackground. To use the default background color, leave the advanced option fieldsempty.

3. Close and reopen the view for the change to take effect.

See also Finding RGB values for colors (p. 239)Background color examples (p. 23)

Background color examples

Below are some examples of possible background colors that you can define. The first RGBvalue refers to the advanced option XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1, the second value to theadvanced option XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2, and so on.

Page 24: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 24/260

 

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

RGB values Result

1.0 1.0 1.0

1.0 1.0 1.0

1.0 1.0 1.0

1.0 1.0 1.0

0.0 0.4 0.2

0.0 0.4 0.2

0.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0 0.0

Page 25: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 25/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 25

Setting up the Workspace

See also Changing the background color (p. 23)

Finding RGB values for colors (p. 239)

2.2 Work area

Tekla Structures indicates the work area of a view using green, dashed lines.

0.3 0.0 0.6

0.3 0.0 0.6

1.0 1.0 1.0

1.0 1.0 1.0

0.0 0.2 0.7

0.0 0.8 0.7

0.0 0.2 0.7

0.0 0.8 0.7

RGB values Result

Page 26: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 26/260

 

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

You can define the work area to suit particular situations, for example, to concentrate on aparticular area of the model. Defining the work area makes it faster and easier to work with themodel. Objects outside the work area still exist, but they are not visible.

See also Defining the work area (p. 26)

Hiding the work area (p. 26)

Defining the work area

You can shrink and expand the work area by picking the corner points of the new work area, orsize the work area to include selected parts, or all model objects. You can define the work areain a selected view, or in all visible views.

To define the work area:

1. Select a command from View > Fit Work Area.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

2. Define the work area by following the instructions on the status bar.

See also Work area (p. 25)

Hiding the work area

If you want, you can hide the green work area box. This can be useful, for example, whencreating screenshots for presentations.

1. Click  Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.

2. Set the XS_HIDE_WORKAREA advanced option to TRUE.

3. Click  OK or Apply.

4. Click  View > Redraw All. Tekla Structures hides the work area.

5. To make the work area visible again, set the advanced option to FALSE.

See also Work area (p. 25)

Alternatively, hold down the Ctrl and Shift keys when clicking View >

Redraw All to hide the green work area box. To make the box visibleagain, click View > Redraw All again.

Page 27: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 27/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 27

Setting up the Workspace

2.3 Work plane

The red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane, which is the local coordinate systemof the model. The work plane also has its own grid, which can be used for positioning parts.Tekla Structures displays the work plane grid in dark red color.

To display the work plane grid, select Work plane from the second list box on the Snapping toolbar.

The red arrow symbol shows the xy plane. The z direction follows the right-hand rule.

Most of the commands that are dependent on the coordinate system use work planecoordinates. For example creating points, part positioning, and copying always comply with thework plane coordinate system. The current work plane is model-specific, so it is the same in allviews.

See also Shifting the work plane (p. 27)

Restoring the default work plane (p. 28)

Changing the color of the work plane grid (p. 28)Right-hand rule (p. 239)

Shifting the work plane

You can shift the work plane to any position by picking points, parallel to one of the globalbasic planes, or on a part or view plane. When modeling sloped parts, shifting the work planehelps you to place parts accurately. For example, to model horizontal bracing and purlins in asloped roof, you need to shift the work plane to the slope of the roof.

To shift the work plane:

1. Click  View > Set Work Plane and select one of the commands.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

2. Shift the work plane by following the instructions on the status bar.

3. Optional: In the second list box on the Snapping toolbar, select Work plane to displaythe work plane grid.

Page 28: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 28/260

 

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

See also Work plane (p. 27)

Restor ing the default work plane

Remember to change back to the default work plane when you have finished modeling slopedstructures.

To restore the default work plane:

1. Click  View > Set Work Plane > Parallel to XY(Z) Plane...

2. Set Plane to XY.

3. Set Depth coordinate to 0.

4. Click  Change.

See also Work plane (p. 27)

Changing the color of the work plane grid

To change the color of the work plane grid:

1. Click  Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.

2. Modify the advanced option XS_GRID_COLOR_FOR_WORK_PLANE.

Define the color using RGB values on a scale of 0 to 1. For example, to change the colorto red, set the value to 1.0 0.0 0.0.

3. Click  OK.

4. Close and reopen the view for the change to take effect.

See also Work plane (p. 27)

Finding RGB values for colors (p. 239)

2.4 Coordinate system

The symbol with three axes (x, y, and z) represents the local coordinate system and indicatesthe direction of the model. It is located in the lower right corner of the model view. Thecoordinate symbol follows the work plane.

Page 29: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 29/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 29

Setting up the Workspace

In wire frame views, the green cube represents the global coordinate system and lies at theglobal point of origin.

See also Work plane (p. 27)

View types (p. 36)

2.5 Grids

Grids are used as an aid in locating objects in a Tekla Structures model. A grid represents athree-dimensional complex of horizontal and vertical planes. The grid is shown on the viewplane using dash-and-dot lines.

You can make grids and grid lines act magnetically so that the objects on the grid lines follow if 

you move the grid line.

Grid origin is the point where the zero points of each coordinate axisintersect

Grid line extensions define how far the grid lines extend in each direction

Grid labels are the names of the grid lines shown in views

Page 30: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 30/260

 

30 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

You can have more than one grid in a model. So that you can easily locate objects in yourmodel, we strongly advise that you create a modular grid. You can create a large-scale grid forthe entire structure, and smaller grids for some detailed sections. You can also create single gridlines and attach them to an existing grid.

See also Creating a grid (p. 30)

Modifying a grid (p. 31)Deleting a grid (p. 31)

Changing the grid color (p. 31)

Grid lines (p. 32)

Creating a grid

When you create a new model, Tekla Structures automatically creates a grid and a viewaccording to the saved standard properties. You can also create grids manually.

To manually create a grid:

1. Click  Modeling > Create Grid...2. Modify the grid properties.

3. Optional: To bind objects to the grid lines, select the Magnetic grid plane check box.

4. Optional: When prompted, pick a point to indicate the origin of the grid.

The coordinates of the picked point appear in the Grid dialog box as X0, Y0, and Z0.

If you do not pick a point, Tekla Structures positions the origin according to the valuesyou entered for X0, Y0, and Z0.

5. Click  Create.

See also Grids (p. 29)

Grid coordinates (p. 30)

Grid labels (p. 31)Grid properties (p. 211)

Grid coordinatesThe x and y coordinates of a grid are relative. This means that the entries for x and y are alwaysrelative to the previous entry. The z coordinates are absolute, which means that entries for z areabsolute distances from the work plane origin.

There are two ways to enter the x or y coordinates of grid lines:

• Define the coordinates individually. For example, 0 4000 4000.

• Define several grid lines with equal spacing. For example, 0 2*4000.

Both methods create three lines with the spacing of 4000.

See also Creating a grid (p. 30)

Coordinate system (p. 28)

Use a zero at the start to represent a grid on the 0,0 coordinate and spacesas separators for coordinates. You can have a maximum of 1024characters in the coordinates field.

Page 31: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 31/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 31

Setting up the Workspace

Grid labelsLabels are the names of the grid lines shown in views. The names in the X field are associatedwith the grid lines parallel to the y axis and vice versa. The Z field is for the names of levelsparallel to the work plane. If you wish, you can leave the label fields empty.

See also Grids (p. 29)

Creating a grid (p. 30)

Modifying a grid

To modify a grid:

1. Ensure that the Select grid selection switch is selected.

2. Double-click a grid line. The Grid dialog box appears.

3. Modify the grid properties.

4. Click  Modify to save the changes.

See also Grids (p. 29)

Grid properties (p. 211)

Deleting a grid

To delete a grid:

1. Ensure that the Select grid selection switch is selected.

2. Select a grid line.

3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.

See also Grids (p. 29)

Changing the grid color 

To change the color of the grid in rendered views:

When working with very large grids, always having the grid labelsvisible might slow down Tekla Structures. To hide the grid labels whenyou zoom in, use the advanced option XS_ADJUST_GRID_LABELS.

If you have attached additional grid lines to the grid and you want topreserve them, clear the check boxes next to the coordinate fields in theGrid dialog box.

If the coordinate check boxes are selected, Tekla Structures deletes allsingle grid lines attached to the grid.

When you delete a grid, ensure that you do not have any other objectsselected. If you have also other objects selected, Tekla Structures onlydeletes the objects, not the grid.

Page 32: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 32/260

 

32 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

1. Click  Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.

2. Modify the advanced option XS_GRID_COLOR.

Define the color using RGB values on a scale of 0 to 1. For example, to change the colorto red, set the value to 1.0 0.0 0.0.

3. Click  OK.

4. Close and reopen the view for the change to take effect.

See also Grids (p. 29)

Finding RGB values for colors (p. 239)

Grid lines

You can attach single grid lines to an existing grid.

Single grid lines have handles. When you select a grid line, the handles appear in magenta. Youcan use handles to move the grid lines.

See also Grids (p. 29)

Creating a single grid line (p. 32)

Modifying a single grid line (p. 33)

Deleting a single grid line (p. 33)

Moving a part using handles (p. 57)

Creating a single grid lineTo create a single grid line:

1. Click  Modeling > Add Grid Line.

2. Select an existing grid to attach the grid line to.

3. Pick the starting point of the grid line.

4. Pick the end point of the grid line.

If you want to move the grid lines using the handles to make a skewedgrid, you can do this only on the local XY plane of the grid.

Page 33: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 33/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 33

Setting up the Workspace

See also Grid lines (p. 32)

Modifying a single grid lineTo modify a single grid line:

1. Ensure that the Select grid line selection switch is selected.2. Double-click a grid line. The Grid Line Properties dialog box appears.

3. Modify the grid line properties.

4. Click  Modify to save the changes.

See also Grid lines (p. 32)

Grid line properties (p. 212)

Deleting a single grid l ineTo delete a single grid line:

1. Ensure that the Select grid line selection switch is selected.2. Select the grid line you want to delete.

3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.

See also Grid lines (p. 32)

2.6 Views

A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in itsown window inside the Tekla Structures window.

There are several ways to create views in Tekla Structures. For example, you can create views:

• of the entire structure

• of selected parts and components

• of selected cast units and assemblies

•along the grid lines

When you delete a grid line, ensure that you do not have any otherobjects selected. If you also have other objects selected, Tekla Structuresonly deletes the objects, not the grid line.

Page 34: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 34/260

 

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

See also Creating a view (p. 35)

Opening a view (p. 38)

Modifying a view (p. 38)

Deleting a view (p. 38)

Switching between open views (p. 39)

Switching between 3D and plane view (p. 39)

Refreshing views (p. 39)

Arranging views (p. 39)

Should I model in a 3D or plane view?

3D, plane, and elevation views provide different types of information, which is useful fordifferent tasks.

One common technique is to open several views:

• A 3D view to see a real-life version of the model

• A plane view, where you can add and connect parts

• An elevation view to check the level

Selecting a part in a view highlights the part in all open views.

When you need to see a specific part clearly, create a 3D view of thepart. This places the part in the center of the view.

Page 35: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 35/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 35

Setting up the Workspace

See also Views (p. 33)

Switching between 3D and plane view (p. 39)

Creating a view

To create a new view:

1. Select a view command from the View menu.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

2. Create the view by following the instructions on the status bar.

3. Optional: Save the view.

a Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.

b Type a unique name in the Name field.

c Click  Modify.

See also Views (p. 33)

View settings (p. 215)

About naming views (p. 35)

View types (p. 36)

View planes (p. 36)

Creating grid views (p. 38)

 About naming viewsTekla Structures numbers views in order of creation, so you do not have to give each view aspecific name.

You should give each view a unique name if you need to open it in later sessions. When you

exit the model, Tekla Structures only saves the named views. Temporary views, which have adefault name in parentheses, disappear when you close them.

See also Creating a view (p. 35)

If you are working with two screens, maximize your work area byputting the elevation and 3D views on one screen and the plane view onthe other.

Temporary views have a default name in parentheses. Do not useparentheses when naming a view, or the view will not be saved for lateruse.

In multi-user mode, it is very important to give views unique names. If several users have different views with the same name, the view settingsof one user may randomly override the settings of another user.

Page 36: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 36/260

 

36 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

View typesThe view type defines the appearance of the view. It also affects what methods you can use torotate the model. The view type options are:

• Rendered

Objects look more realistic because they are non-transparent and their surfaces are

displayed.• Wire frame

Objects are transparent and their outlines are displayed. You cannot rotate the model withthe mouse in wire frame views.

See also Creating a view (p. 35)

Representation options (p. 128)

View planesEach view has a view plane on which the grids are visible and points are represented as yellowcrosses. Points that are located outside the view plane are red.

Basic views Basic views are those parallel to the global basic planes (xy, xz, and zy). In basic views, twoaxes always define the view plane and the axes appear in the plane name. The third axis isperpendicular to the view plane. It does not appear in the plane name. In the basic plane view,the model is shown from the direction of the third axis.

The view plane options for basic views are:

Plane: XY

Page 37: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 37/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 37

Setting up the Workspace

For basic views, you also define the distance the view plane is from the global origin in thedirection of the third axis. The view plane coordinate equals this distance.

Other views For view types other than basic views, you either define the view plane and coordinate bypicking points, or the points are defined automatically, depending on the creation method.

See also Moving a view plane (p. 37)

Creating a view (p. 35)

Moving a view planeYou can change the view plane by moving it like any other object. When you move a viewplane, Tekla Structures only uses the vector that is perpendicular to the view plane.

To move the view plane:

1. Click the view.

2. Right-click and select Move Special > Linear... from the pop-up menu.

3. Pick the starting point of the translation vector, or enter its coordinates.

4. Pick the end point of the translation vector, or enter its coordinates.

5. Click  Move.

See also View planes (p. 36)

Plane: XZ

Plane: ZY

If the Move - Linear dialog box is open but the command is not activeanymore, click the Pick button to re-activate the command.

Page 38: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 38/260

 

38 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

Creating grid viewsGrid views are views along the grid lines. You can define how many views Tekla Structureswill create, how it will name the views, and which view properties it will use.

Before you start, create a view that contains a grid.

To create grid views:

1. Select the grid.

2. Click  View > Create View of Model > Along Grid Lines...

3. Modify the grid properties.

4. Click  Create. The Views dialog box appears.

5. Click the arrow buttons to show or hide the grid views.

The grid views will not be visible until you move them to the visible views in the Views dialog box.

See also Creating a view (p. 35)

Grid view properties (p. 215)

Opening a viewTo view and open an existing view:

1. Click  View > View List....

The Views dialog box appears. Tekla Structures lists all invisible named views on theleft, and all visible views on the right.

2. Select a view and use the arrows between the lists, or double-click a view to open it.

See also Views (p. 33)

Modifying a viewTo modify an existing view:

1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.

2. Modify the view properties.

3. Click  Modify.

See also Views (p. 33)

View settings (p. 215)

Deleting a view

To delete a named view:

You can have up to nine views on the screen at the same time. If you tryto open more than nine views, Tekla Structures displays a warning. If theview does not appear, check how many views you have open.

To open multiple views, use the Shift and Ctrl keys when you selectviews from the list.

Page 39: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 39/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 39

Setting up the Workspace

1. Click  View > View List....

The Views dialog box appears. Tekla Structures lists all invisible named views on theleft, and all visible views on the right.

2. Select the view you want to delete.

3. Click  Delete.

See also Views (p. 33)

Switching between open views

To switch between open views, do one of the following:

• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Tab.• On the Window menu, select a view from the list.

See also Views (p. 33)

Switching between 3D and plane view (p. 39)

Switching between 3D and plane view

To switch between the 3D and the plane view, do one of the following:

• Press Ctrl+P.

• Click  View > Switch to 3D / Plane.

• In the View Properties dialog box, select an option from the Angle list box, and thenclick Modify.

See also Views (p. 33)

Switching between open views (p. 39)

Refreshing views

To refresh the screen display, do any of the following:

See also Views (p. 33)

 Arranging views

You can arrange views manually by dragging and dropping each view within the Tekla

Structures window, or have Tekla Structures automatically arrange views.

To delete multiple views, use the Shift and Ctrl keys when you selectviews from the list.

To Do thisRedraw the contents of the activeview

Right-click the view and select Redraw View fromthe pop-up menu.

Redraw the contents of all theviews

Click View > Redraw All.

Page 40: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 40/260

 

40 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

To arrange the views, do any of the following:

See also Views (p. 33)

2.7 Construct ion objects

Construction planes, lines, and circles help you place other objects. For example, you can

easily pick the points at intersections of construction lines and circles. The snap priority of construction objects is the same as with the other lines.

Construction objects remain in the model when you update or redraw views and windows.They do not appear in drawings.

You can also create magnetic construction lines or planes to bind and move groups of objects.For example, rather than binding lots of handles and chamfers to faces, simply create aconstruction plane that goes through all the handles and chamfers. Then make this planemagnetic and bind the plane to the appropriate face. When you move the plane, the attachedhandles and chamfers move with it.

See also Creating a construction plane (p. 40)

Creating a construction line (p. 41)

Creating a construction circle (p. 41)

Creating a construction plane

To create a construction plane:

1. Click  Modeling > Add Construction Plane.

2. Pick four points.

3. Click the middle mouse button. Tekla Structures draws the plane.

4. Double-click the plane in the model. The Construction Plane Properties dialog boxappears.

5. Type a name for the plane.6. Optional: To make the construction plane magnetic, select the Magnetic check box.

To Do this

Arrange all open views in astack 

Click Windows > Cascade.

Arrange all open viewshorizontally

Click Windows > Tile Horizontally.

Arrange all open viewsvertically

Click Windows > Tile Vertically.

Close all the views Click  View > Close All.

You cannot use the Cascade, Tile Horizontally, and Tile Vertically commands for views that you can move outside the Tekla Structureswindow.

For more information on how to move part and component basic viewsand zoom windows across the entire Windows desktop, seeXS_MDIVIEWPARENT, XS_MDIZOOMPARENT, andXS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT.

Page 41: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 41/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 41

Setting up the Workspace

7. Click  Modify.

See also Construction objects (p. 40)

Creating a construction line

To create a construction line:

1. Click  Modeling > Add Construction Line.2. Pick the starting point of the construction line.

3. Pick the end point of the construction line.

4. Optional: Make the construction line magnetic.

a Double-click the line in the model.

b Select the Magnetic check box.

c Click  Modify.

See also Construction objects (p. 40)

Creating a construction circle

To create a construction circle:

1. Select a command from Modeling > Add Construction Circle.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

2. Create the construction circle by following the instructions on the status bar.

See also Construction objects (p. 40)

Page 42: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 42/260

 

42 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

2.8 Points

You can create points to make it easier to place objects at positions where no lines or objectsintersect.

There are many ways to create points in Tekla Structures. Which method is the most convenientat each time depends on what you have already created in the model and which locations youcan easily pick.

When you create points, Tekla Structures always places them according to the work planecoordinate system. Points located on the view plane are yellow and points outside the viewplane are red.

See also Creating a point (p. 42)

Importing points (p. 42)

Point properties (p. 212)

Creating a point

To create a point:

1. Use the icons on the Points toolbar, or select a command from Modeling > Add Points.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

2. Create the point by following the instructions on the status bar.

See also Points (p. 42)

Importing points

You can import points to specific locations in an open Tekla Structures model using the pointcreation import macro. You need to specify the point coordinates in a text file. In some casesthis file is generated by another software package.

To import points from a file:

1. Create a point import file.

This section is for advanced users.

Page 43: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 43/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 43

Setting up the Workspace

a Create a text file that consists of single lines for each point.

Use commas or tabs as delimiters for the three point coordinates on a line. Forexample:

100,500,1000

300,700,1500

b Save the file.2. Press Ctrl + F to open the Component Catalog.

3. Type point in the Search field and click Search.

4. Double-click  Point Creation Import (8).

5. Type the ASCII file name.

Include the full path and the file extension. If you do not specify the path, TeklaStructures looks for the file in the current model folder.

6. Define the origin of the imported points by entering the coordinates.

7. Click  Create.

See also Points (p. 42)

2.9 Reference models

A reference model is a file which helps you to build a Tekla Structures model. A reference

model is created in Tekla Structures or another software or modeling tool and imported to TeklaStructures.

For example, an architectural model, a plant design model, or a heating, ventilating and air-conditioning (HVAC) model can be used as a reference model. Reference models can also besimple 2D drawings that are imported and then used as a layout to directly build the model on.

The following file types are supported:

• AutoCAD (*.dxf)

• AutoCAD (*.dwg)

• MicroStation (*.dgn, *.prp)

• Cadmatic models (*.3dd)

• IFC files (*.IFC)

• IGES files (*.igs, *.iges)

• Tekla WebViewer XML files (*.xml)

You can snap to reference model geometry. Tekla Structures loads the reference model from thefile each time you open your model. It does not save the reference model when you save thecurrent model. The filename extension of a saved reference model properties file is *.rop.

See also Inserting a reference model (p. 44)

Modifying reference model properties (p. 44)

Selecting a reference model (p. 45)

Hiding a reference model (p. 45)

Highlighting a reference model (p. 45)

During the import process, Tekla Structures ignores all lines in the

import file which do not consist of valid values delimited by tabs orcommas.

Page 44: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 44/260

 

44 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

Updating reference models (p. 45)

Detecting changes in a reference model (p. 45)

Viewing reference model layers (p. 46)

Reference model objects (p. 47)

Supported DGN objects (p. 48)

Inserting a reference model

To insert a reference model in a Tekla Structures model:

1. Open a Tekla Structures model.

2. Check the work plane position, as it determines the rotation of the reference model in theTekla Structures model.

3. Click  File > Insert Reference Model...

4. Click the Browse... button to browse for the reference model file.

5. Set the scale of the reference model, if it is different to the one in the Tekla Structuresmodel (for example, if it uses different measurement units).

6. Click  Apply or OK to save the current reference model properties.

7. Pick a position to define the reference model origin.

Tekla Structures displays the reference model origin as a handle.

See also Reference models (p. 43)

Modifying reference model properties

To modify the properties of a reference model:

1. Click  File > Reference Model List...

2. Double-click the reference model to open the Reference Model Properties dialog box.

3. Click  User-defined attributes.

4. Modify the properties and then click Modify.

See also Reference models (p. 43)

If you do not define a reference model file to use, the file does not exist,or you forget to click Apply, Tekla Structures displays a defaultreference model. The default reference model is a white cross:

You can define user-defined attributes in the objects.inp file. Formore information on user-defined attributes, see Adding properties.

Page 45: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 45/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 45

Setting up the Workspace

Selecting a reference model

To select a reference model:

1. Activate the Select component switch.

2. Select the reference model.

See also Reference models (p. 43)

Selecting a reference model object (p. 48)

Hiding a reference model

To hide a reference model:

1. Click  File > Reference Model List...

2. Select Hidden from the Visibility list box.

See also Reference models (p. 43)

Highlighting a reference model

To check which reference models are included in the model, you can highlight them.

To highlight a reference model:

1. Click  File > Reference Model List...

2. Select a reference model from the list.

The reference model is highlighted in the Tekla Structures model.

See also Reference models (p. 43)

Updating reference models

You can update the reference models in your Tekla Structures model in case there have beenchanges in the original reference models after you have brought them into Tekla Structures.

To update all reference models:

1. Click  File > Reference Model List...

2. Click  Reload all.

Tekla Structures goes through all the reference models and regenerates the cache for thereference models that have a newer modified date than the one already in the cache.

See also Reference models (p. 43)

Detecting changes in a reference model

Reference models are often updated, but the changes are rarely documented. You can see thechanges between an old and a new reference model in Tekla Structures by using the commandsin the Reference Model Properties dialog box.

You can detect changes in reference models that are of the following file formats:

• IFC (.ifc)

• Cadmatic (.3dd)

• WebViewer (.xml)

• 3D DWG (.dwg)

Page 46: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 46/260

 

46 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

To view changes in a reference model:

1. Double-click the reference model.

2. In the Reference Model Properties dialog box, browse for the name of the old file byclicking the Browse... button next to the Old file name field.

3. Select an option in the Show list box in the Change detection section.

For example, select Inserted to see the added objects.

4. Click  Display. Tekla Structures highlights the inserted reference model objects.

See also Reference models (p. 43)

Viewing reference model layers

You can view different layers of a reference model. This is useful if you want to for exampleexamine only certain parts of the model.

To view reference model layers:

1. Double-click the reference model.

Page 47: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 47/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 47

Setting up the Workspace

2. In the Reference Model Properties dialog box, click Select layers...

3. Select the layers you want to view. Depending on your reference model, you could forexample select a layer that contains only windows.

4. Click  OK.

5. Click  Modify in the Reference Model Properties dialog box. Tekla Structureshighlights the layer with windows.

See also Reference models (p. 43)

Reference model objects

You can split reference models into separate reference model objects . Reference modelobjects can have separate user-defined attributes that can be used for reports and the view and

selection filters.

The reference model objects are read-only.

Limitations The use of this functionality depends on the file format and file structure. You can use it forexample for IFC and for DWG files that include any of the following objects:

• block table

• polyface mesh

• polygon mesh

• proxy object (for example, ADT)

• ACIS objects (3DSolid, Body, Region)

Page 48: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 48/260

 

48 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

See also Reference models (p. 43)

Selecting a reference model object (p. 48)

Splitting a reference model into reference model objects (p. 48)

Selecting a reference model objectTo select a reference model object:

1. Activate the Select objects in components switch.

2. Select the desired object in the reference model.

See also Reference model objects (p. 47)

Selecting a reference model (p. 45)

Splitt ing a reference model into reference model objectsYou can quickly split reference models into reference model objects. After you have split thereference model into reference model objects, you can use the ID number and attributes of thereference model objects for example in filtering and reports.

To split a reference model into reference model objects:

1. Select the reference model and double-click it to display the Reference Model

Properties dialog box.

2. Click  Subdivide.

See also Reference model objects (p. 47)

Filtering reference model object properties

Supported DGN objects

Tekla Structures can display the following DGN objects in reference models:

• Line Elements (Type 3)

• Line String (Type 4)

• Shape (Type 6)

• Text Nodes (Type 7)

You cannot use this functionality for DGN, STEP, or IGES files.

The advanced optionXS_USE_EXACT_EXTREMA_FOR_REFERENCE_MODELS isnot compatible with this feature.

When you have split the reference model into reference model objects,the ID numbers of all the reference model objects are visible in themodel database, even if you remove the reference model object andupdate the reference model.

Page 49: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 49/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 49

Setting up the Workspace

• Curve (Type 11)

• Complex Chains (Type 12)

• Complex Shapes (Type 14)

• Elliptic Elements (Type 15)

• Arc Elements (Type 16)

• Text Elements (Type 17)

• Surfaces (Type 18)

• Solids (Type 19)

• Point String Elements (Type 22)

• Cone Elements (Type 23)

• B-spline Surfaces (Type 24)

• B-spline Curves (Type 27)

• Shared Cells (Type 34, 35)

• Mesh Elements (Type 105), subtype "Indexed Face Loops"

See also Reference models (p. 43)

The following DGN objects are not supported:

• Dimension Elements (Type 33)

• Multiline Elements (Type 36)

• Mesh Elements (Type 105), other subtypes than "Indexed Face

Loops"

SmartSolid elements are supported as WireFrame only.

Page 50: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 50/260

 

50 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Setting up the Workspace

Page 51: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 51/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 51

Creating and Modifying Structures

3 Creating and ModifyingStructures

This section explains how to create and modify parts using different materials and profiles. Italso includes a general description of part properties and step-by-step instructions for all thepart commands.

Contents • Parts (p. 51)

• Part position (p. 57)

• Steel parts (p. 66)

• Assemblies (p. 70)

• Concrete parts (p. 77)

• Cast units (p. 81)

3.1 Parts

In Tekla Structures, the term part refers to the basic building objects that can be modeled anddetailed further. These are the building blocks of the physical model.

Every part has properties that define it, such as material, profile, and location. You can use partproperties in view and selection filters. For example, you can select, modify, and hide partsbased on their properties. You can also include part properties and user-defined attributes indrawing and report templates.

See also Part properties (p. 217)

Part types (p. 52)

Profiles (p. 52)

Materials (p. 54)

Colors (p. 55)

User-defined attributes (p. 55)

Part labels (p. 56)

Page 52: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 52/260

 

52 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

Part types

The main steel parts are:

• column

• beam

• polybeam

• curved beam

• contour plate

The main concrete parts are:

• pad footing

• strip footing

• column

• beam

• polybeam

• slab

• panel

See also Parts (p. 51)

Steel parts (p. 66)

Concrete parts (p. 77)

Profiles

Tekla Structures contains standard, parametric, and user-defined profiles.

When you create or modify a part, you can select the profile from a tree that contains all the

profiles available in the profile catalog. The profiles are grouped according to rules that you candefine and modify.

For user-defined profiles Tekla Structures also displays cross section information.

See also Changing the profile of a part (p. 52)

Standard profiles (p. 53)

Parametric profiles (p. 53)

User-defined profiles (p. 53)

The profile catalog

Changing the profi le of a partTo change the profile of a part:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.

2. Open the Select Profile dialog box.

• For steel parts, click the Select... button next to the Profile field.

Icon Description

A standard profile.

A parametric profile.

Page 53: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 53/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 53

Creating and Modifying Structures

• For concrete parts, click the button next to the Shape field.

By default, only the profile types that are relevant to the material of the part are shown.

3. Optional: Define what profile information you want to see.

• To display all the profiles of the profile catalog in the tree, select the Show all

profiles check box.

• To see all the properties of profiles, select the Show details check box.

4. Select a profile from the list.

• To select a recently used profile, use the Profile name list box.

• If you select a parametric profile, enter the profile dimensions in the Value column.

5. Click  Apply or OK.

6. Click  Modify.

See also Profiles (p. 52)

Standard profilesWhen you first start Tekla Structures, the profile catalog contains standard, environment-specific profiles.

The properties of these library profiles conform to industry standards, so you should not editthem. You can add profiles to the profile catalog.

See also Profiles (p. 52)

Parametric profilesYou can use parametric profiles to model profiles that are standard in a specific environment,but do not exist in the Tekla Structures profile catalog. Parametric profiles are partly user-definable and they have a predefined shape, but you determine their size by giving one or moreparameters.

Parametric profile names have specific prefixes and they include dimension values. Dimensionvalues in parametric profile names are separated by the standard separators -, X, /, and *.

You can define alternative prefixes for parametric profiles. You can also define additionalseparators using the variables XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR andXS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS .

See also Profiles (p. 52)

User-defined profi lesYou can create your own profiles and save them in the profile catalog. For example, you couldcreate a pitched user-defined profile, with different cross sections at the beginning and end of the profile.

See also Profiles (p. 52)

Sketched cross sections (p. 181)

Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile

You can also enter a profile name in the Profile field in the partproperties dialog box.

Page 54: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 54/260

 

54 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

Materials

When you create or modify a part, you can select the material and grade from a tree thatcontains all the materials available in the material catalog.

Each material has the following properties:

See also Changing the material of a part (p. 54)

The material catalog

Changing the material of a part

To change the material of a part:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.

2. Click  Select... next to the Material field.

The Select Material dialog box appears.

3. Optional: Define what material information you want to see.

• To include aliases for material grades in the tree, select the Show aliases check 

box.

• To see all the properties of materials, select the Show details check box.

4. Select a material from the list.

5. Click  Apply or OK.

6. Click  Modify.

See also Materials (p. 54)

Property Description

Alias Aliases are alternative names. For example, they can beformer names, or names used in different countries orstandards.

Tekla Structures automatically translates aliases into thestandard name when you select a material grade.

Analysis information The Analysis tab contains information about the propertiesused in structural analysis, including the modulus of elasticity, Poisson’s ratio, and thermal dilatation coefficient.

Design information The Design tab contains information about design-specific

properties, such as strengths, partial safety factors, and so on.

User attributes Use the User attributes tab to view or modify the user-defined properties of materials.

For example, this tab could contain the maximum grain size,porosity, or surface quality class of a concrete material type,or country-specific properties.

You can also enter a material name in the Material field in the partproperties dialog box.

Page 55: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 55/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 55

Creating and Modifying Structures

Colors

You can change the color of some model objects by modifying their class in the part propertiesdialog box. You can also use the object representation settings to specify colors for definedobject groups.

See also Object representation settings (p. 133)

User-defined attributes

User-defined attributes provide extra information about a part. Attributes can consist of numbers, text, or lists. The following table gives some examples of what you can use attributesfor:

Class Color

black 

1 light gray or white

2 or 0 red

3 bright green

4 blue

5 cyan

6 yellow

7 magenta

8 gray

9 pink  

10 lime

11 aqua

12 lilac

13 orange

14 light blue

Attribute Can be used...

Comment In part and weld marks in Tekla Structures drawings, or inprojects.

Shorten When drawings of the parts are created, Tekla Structuresdecreases the true length of the part by this value. This isuseful when creating assembly drawings of bracing bars thatshould always be under tension.

Camber In part marks in Tekla Structures drawings.

Page 56: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 56/260

 

56 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Part properties (p. 217)

Adding properties

Part labelsYou can display selected part properties, user-defined attributes, and template attributes in amodel view by using part labels .

See also Part properties (p. 217)

Showing part labels in a view (p. 56)

Showing part labels in a viewTo show part labels in a view:

1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.

2. Click  Display...

3. In the Display dialog box, go to the Advanced tab.

4. Select the Part label check box.

Preliminary mark To obtain preliminary marks for parts in reports.

Locked To protect objects from being accidentally changed.

Shear, Tension, and

Moment

To save reaction forces for AutoDefaults. You can enterforces separately for each end of a part.

User field 1...4 User-defined fields. You can change the names of these fieldsand add new user-defined fields.

Connection code When importing information on connection types into TeklaStructures. You can then use the connection codes as rules inAutoConnection and AutoDefaults. Each end of a part canhave a different connection code.

Attribute Can be used...

Page 57: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 57/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 57

Creating and Modifying Structures

5. Define which part properties to display in part labels.

a Select a property in the Properties list.

b Click  Add to add the property to the Part label list.

6. Optional: Define which user-defined attribute or template attribute to display in partlabels.

a Select User-defined attribute in the Properties list.

b Click  Add. The Part label dialog box appears.

c Enter the attribute name and click OK.

7. Click  Modify.

See also Part labels (p. 56)

3.2 Part position

When you create a part, you position it by picking points. The points form the part reference 

line . You can use part reference lines to help snap to the middle points of parts, for example.Tekla Structures indicates the direction of a part with handles . When you select a part, TeklaStructures highlights the handles. The handle of the first end point is yellow, the rest aremagenta.

The handles also symbolize the part reference points . The position of a part is always relativeto its reference points.

See also Moving a part using handles (p. 57)

Showing part reference lines in model views (p. 58)

Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)Part positioning tips (p. 241)

Moving a part using handles

To move a part using the handles:

1. Select the part. Tekla Structures displays the handles.

2. Select the handles.

3. Move the part like any other object.

If Drag and Drop is switched on, just drag the part to a new position.

See also Part position (p. 57)

Page 58: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 58/260

 

58 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

Copying and moving objects

Selecting handles

Showing part reference lines in model views

To see the part reference line in the model:

1. Click  View > View Properties...

2. Click  Display... to open the Display dialog box.

3. On the Advanced tab, select the Part reference line check box.

4. Click  Modify and OK.

See also Part position (p. 57)

Modifying the position of a part

To modify the position of a part, do one of the following:

See also Position on the work plane (p. 59)

To Do this

Modify part position in thepart properties dialog box

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.

2. On the Position tab, modify the desired position settings.

For example, you can define the part to be positioned 200units above its reference points.

3. Click  Modify.

Modify part position usingthe Mini Toolbar

1. Click in the Mini Toolbar.

2. Modify the settings. The object moves in the model

accordingly.• To change the overall position of the part, use the

round selection dial. Click and drag to select aposition.

• To change the rotation angle, click and drag the

green rotation angle knob.

• To change the Angle, Plane offset, or Depth offset,

enter a value in the corresponding box.

The rotation angle knob snaps to every 45 degrees. Hold down Shift tooverride this.

Page 59: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 59/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 59

Creating and Modifying Structures

Rotation (p. 59)

Position depth (p. 60)

Vertical position (p. 61)

Horizontal position (p. 62)

End offsets (p. 63)

Levels (p. 64)

Bending (p. 65)

Position on the work planeWhen you define the position of a part on the work plane, you have the following options:

• Middle

• Right

• Left

You can also define the distance of a part from its original reference line. To do this, type adistance in the field next to the On plane check box.

Examples

See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)

RotationWhen you define the rotation of a part around its axis on the work plane, you have thefollowing options:

• Front

• Top

• Back

Position Example

Middle

Right

Left

Middle 200

Right 200

Left 200

Page 60: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 60/260

 

60 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

• Below

You can also define the angle of rotation. Tekla Structures measures positive values clockwisearound the local x axis.

Examples

See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)

Position depthWhen you define the position of a part in terms of its depth, perpendicular to the work plane,you have the following options:

• Middle

• Front

• Behind

Examples

Position Example

Front

Top

Back

Below

Position Example

Middle

Front

Page 61: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 61/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 61

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)

Vertical positionWhen you define the vertical position of a part, relative to its reference point, you have thefollowing options:

• Middle

• Down

• Up

Examples

Behind

Middle 100

Front 100

Behind 100

Position Example

Position Example

Middle

Down

Up

Page 62: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 62/260

 

62 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)

Horizontal positionWhen you define the horizontal position of a part, relative to its reference point, you have thefollowing options:

• Middle

• Left

• Right

Examples

Middle 100

Down 100

Up 100

Position Example

Position Example

Middle

Left

Right

Middle 100

Page 63: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 63/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 63

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)

End offsetsYou can use end offsets to move the ends of a part, relative to its reference line. You can enterpositive and negative values.

You have the following options:

Examples

Left 100

Right 100

Position Example

Field Description

Dx Changes the length of the part by moving the part end point along thereference line.

Dy Moves the part end perpendicular to the reference line.

Dz Moves the part end in the z direction of the work plane.

Position Example

Dx

End point: 200

Dx

End point: -200

Dy

End point: 300

Page 64: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 64/260

 

64 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)

LevelsFor parts that you create by picking only one point (such as columns), you can enter thepositions of the part ends, relative to the picked point, in the global z direction Tekla Structurescreates the part at the level that you defined in the part properties dialog box, not at the levelyou picked.

You have the following options:

Example In this example, the concrete columns form a two-story structure. To position the uppercolumns correctly, you must modify their bottom level position.

Dy

End point: -300

Dz

End point: 400

Dz

End point: -400

Position Example

Option Description

Bottom Use to define the position of the first end.

Top Use to define the position of the second end.

Page 65: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 65/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 65

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)

BendingYou can create curved parts by defining a radius and the plane of curvature.

When you initiate a command that creates a curved part, for example a curved beam, TeklaStructures prompts you to pick three points to define the radius . Alternatively, you can definethe radius in the part properties dialog box.

To have Tekla Structures draw a curved part, you need to specify the number of segments .Tekla Structures does not show curved surfaces exactly in views, instead the number of segments determines how realistic the curved part looks: the more segments, the less angularthe part appears.

You can also define the plane of curvature , which is relative to the current work plane. Theoptions are:

• XZ plane

• XY plane

Examples

Top level = 1000, Bottom level = 0

Top level = 1700, Bottom level = 1200

Slab thickness = 200

Number of segments: 2

Page 66: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 66/260

 

66 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)

3.3 Steel parts

This section explains how to create steel parts.

See also Creating a steel column (p. 66)

Creating a steel beam (p. 67)

Creating a steel polybeam (p. 67)

Creating a curved beam (p. 68)

Creating a contour plate (p. 68)

Creating an orthogonal beam (p. 69)

Creating a twin profile (p. 70)

Creating a steel column

To create a steel column:

1. Optional: Modify the steel column properties.

2. Click the Create column icon.

3. Pick the position of the column.

Tekla Structures creates the column at the level that you defined in the Column

Properties dialog box.

Number of segments: 5

Number of segments: 15

Page 67: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 67/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 67

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Steel column properties (p. 218)

Levels (p. 64)

Creating a steel beam

To create a steel beam:

1. Optional: Modify the steel beam properties.

2. Click the Create beam icon.

3. Pick the starting point.

4. Pick the end point.

See also Steel beam properties (p. 218)

Creating a steel polybeam

A polybeam can contain straight and curved segments. You can also create bent plates with thiscommand.

To create a steel polybeam:

1. Optional: Modify the steel beam properties.

2. Click the Create polybeam icon.

3. Pick the points you want the beam to go through.

Use the Orthogonal Beam Properties dialog box to correct the positionof a column, if the upper and lower levels were switched when thecolumn was copied and mirrored. Remember to change the part name toCOLUMN.

Page 68: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 68/260

 

68 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the polybeam.

See also Polybeam chamfers (p. 106)

Steel beam properties (p. 218)

Polybeam length calculation

Creating a curved beam

To create a curved steel beam:1. Optional: Modify the steel beam properties.

2. Click the Create curved beam icon.

3. Pick the starting point (1).

4. Pick a point on the arc (2).

5. Pick the end point (3).

See also Steel beam properties (p. 218)

Bending (p. 65)

Creating a contour p late

When you create a contour plate, the profile you use defines the thickness of the plate and thepicked points define the shape. The corners of the contour plate can be chamfered.

To create a contour plate:

1. Optional: Modify the contour plate properties.

2. Click the Create contour plate icon.

3. Pick the starting point.

4. Pick the corner points of the contour plate.

5. Pick the starting point again, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

Page 69: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 69/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 69

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Creating a round contour plate (p. 69)

Contour plate properties (p. 219)

Creating a round contour plateTo create a round contour plate:

1. Create a square contour plate with its sides equal to the diameter of the round plate youwant to create.

2. Select the plate.

3. Double-click a handle to display the Chamfer Properties dialog box.

4. Select the round chamfer symbol from the list box.

5. Type the chamfer radius in the x field.

6. Click  Modify.

7. Repeat steps 3–5 for each corner.

See also Creating a contour plate (p. 68)

Contour plate properties (p. 219)

Chamfers (p. 104)

Creating an orthogonal beam

To create a steel beam that is orthogonal to the work plane:

1. Optional: Modify the orthogonal beam properties.

2. Click  Modeling > Steel Parts > Orthogonal Beam...

3. Pick the position of the beam.

Page 70: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 70/260

 

70 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Orthogonal beam properties (p. 220)

Creating a twin profile

A twin profile consists of two identical beams. You define the positions of both beams byselecting the twin profile type and setting the clearance between the beams in two directions.

To create a twin steel profile:

1. Optional: Modify the twin profile properties.

2. Click  Modeling > Create Steel Part > Twin Profile.

3. Pick the starting point.

4. Pick the end point.

See also Twin profile properties (p. 221)

3.4 Assemblies

Tekla Structures creates basic assemblies of steel parts when you use a workshop weld or bolt

to join parts together. Assemblies and their main parts are automatically defined when you:

• Create single workshop welds or bolts.

• Apply automatic connections which create workshop welds or bolts.

You can also create nested assemblies by adding sub-assemblies to existing assemblies, or by joining assemblies together.

The main part in a steel assembly has other parts welded or bolted to it. By default, the mainpart is not welded or bolted to any other parts. You can change the main part in an assembly.

See also Creating an assembly (p. 71)

Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)

Removing objects from an assembly (p. 75)

Highlighting objects in an assembly (p. 75)

Page 71: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 71/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 71

Creating and Modifying Structures

Exploding an assembly (p. 76)

Assembly examples (p. 76)

Selecting assemblies and cast units

Creating an assembly

To create an assembly:

1. Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.

2. Select the parts and/or assemblies that you want to join together.

3. Right-click and select Make into Assembly from the pop-up menu.

See also Assemblies (p. 70)

Creating a sub-assembly (p. 71)

Using bolts to create assemblies (p. 71)

Using welds to create assemblies (p. 72)

Creating a sub-assemblyTo create a sub-assembly of parts that are already in an assembly:

1. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.

2. Select the parts you want to include in the sub-assembly.

3. Right-click and select Make into Sub-Assembly from the pop-up menu.

See also Creating an assembly (p. 71)

Using bol ts to create assembliesYou can use bolts to create and connect assemblies. You can create nested assemblies byconnecting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly, or you can just connect more parts toassemblies using bolts.

To control how Tekla Structures creates assemblies, use the Connect part/assembly and Bolt

type list boxes in the Bolt Properties dialog box. The order in which you select parts whencreating the connection determines the main and secondary parts of the assembly or theassembly hierarchy.

See also Assemblies (p. 70)

Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly (p. 72)

Connect part/assembly Bolt type Result

As sub-assembly Workshop or Site Nested assembly with the assembly you arebolting as a sub-assembly.

The first part you pick determines theassembly to which you are bolting.

As secondary part Workshop Basic assembly with the part you arebolting as a secondary part.

The first part you pick usually becomes themain part in the assembly.

As secondary part Site No assembly created.

Page 72: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 72/260

 

72 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assemblyTo bolt sub-assemblies to an existing assembly:

1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.

2. In the Connect part/assembly list box, select As sub-assembly.

3. Click  Apply or OK.

4. Select a part in the assembly to bolt to.5. Select a part in the sub-assembly to be bolted.

6. Pick the bolt group origin.

7. Pick a point to indicate the bolt group x direction.

See also Using bolts to create assemblies (p. 71)

Using welds to create assembliesTekla Structures forms assemblies based on where the weld should be made. You can createworkshop welds and site welds.

The order in which you select parts when creating the connection determines the main andsecondary parts of the assembly or the assembly hierarchy. The first part you select becomesthe main part of the assembly. Tekla Structures dimensions secondary parts relative to the mainpart in assembly drawings. The largest main part in the weld becomes the main part of theassembly.

When you connect assemblies, the first part you select determines the assembly to which youweld sub-assemblies.

To control how Tekla Structures creates assemblies, use the Connect part/assembly andWorkshop/Site list boxes in the Weld Properties dialog box.

See also Assemblies (p. 70)

Welding sub-assemblies to an existing assembly (p. 72)

Welding sub-assemblies to an exist ing assemblyTo weld sub-assemblies to an existing assembly:

1. Double-click the Create weld between parts icon to open the Weld Properties dialogbox.

2. In the Connect part/assembly list box, select As sub-assembly.

3. Click  Apply or OK.

4. Select a part in the assembly to weld to.

5. Select a part in the sub-assembly to be welded.

6. Optional: Create a drawing to check that the weld marks look correct.

See also Using welds to create assemblies (p. 72)

Connect part/assembly Workshop/Site Result

As sub-assembly Workshop or Site Nested assembly with the assembly you arewelding as a sub-assembly.

The first part you pick determines theassembly to which you are welding.

As secondary part Workshop Basic assembly with the part you arewelding as a secondary part.

The first part you pick usually becomes themain part in the assembly.

As secondary part Site No assembly created.

Page 73: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 73/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 73

Creating and Modifying Structures

 Adding objects to assemblies

You can add objects to assemblies in the following ways:

See alsoAssemblies (p. 70)Assembly hierarchy (p. 73)

Adding parts to an assembly (p. 74)

Creating a nested assembly (p. 74)

Joining assemblies (p. 75)

Changing the assembly main part (p. 75)

Changing the main assembly (p. 75)

 Assembly hierarchyYou can work on any level of a nested assembly, from single parts and bolts, through the basic

and sub-assemblies, up to the highest level of the nested assembly.To work with nested assemblies, you need to know how to use the Shift key and mousescrolling to select objects on different levels in assembly hierarchy.

To Do this

Create a basic assembly Do one of the following:

• Add parts to an existing assembly as secondary

parts.

• Bolt or weld parts to an existing assembly as

secondary parts.

Create a nested assembly Do one of the following:

• Add parts to an existing assembly as secondary

parts.

• Bolt or weld assemblies to an existing assembly as

sub-assemblies.

• Add assemblies to an existing assembly as sub-assemblies.

• Join existing assemblies together without adding

any loose parts.

Sub-assemblies in a nested assembly retain their own assemblyinformation and main part. You can also define properties separately forthe sub-assemblies and the nested assembly by using the part propertiesdialog box.

Page 74: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 74/260

 

74 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

Assembly hierarchy in nested assemblies affects drawings and reports. You can create separatedrawings and reports of the sub-assemblies and the nested assembly, and still producedimensions, marks, fabrication information, etc. for all assembly levels.

See also Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)

Selecting nested assemblies and components

 Adding parts to an assemblyTo add secondary parts to a basic assembly or to any level of a nested assembly:

1. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.

2. Select the part you want to add.

3. Right-click and select Assembly > Add to Assembly from the pop-up menu.4. Select the assembly to add to.

See also Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)

Creating a nested assemblyTo create a nested assembly:

1. Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.

2. Select the assemblies you want to add to another assembly. They will become sub-assemblies in the nested assembly.

3. Right-click and select Assembly > Add as sub-assembly from the pop-up menu.

4. Select the assembly to add to.

Page 75: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 75/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 75

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)

Joining assembliesTo join existing assemblies without adding any loose parts:

1. Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.

2. Select the assemblies you want to join.3. Right-click and select Assembly > Make into Assembly from the pop-up menu.

The assembly with the largest volume becomes the main assembly.

See also Changing the main assembly (p. 75)

Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)

Changing the assembly main partTo change the main part in an assembly:

1. Check what is currently the main part of the assembly.

a Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.

b Click  Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.c Select the assembly.

Tekla Structures highlights the main and secondary parts in different colors.

2. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.

3. Click  Modeling > Assembly > Set as New Main Object of Assembly.

4. Select the new main part.

Tekla Structures changes the main part.

See also Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)

Changing the main assemblyWhen you join two or more assemblies together, the assembly with the largest volume becomesthe main assembly. You can change the main assembly at any time.

To change the main assembly in a nested assembly:

1. Select the new main assembly.

2. Right-click and select Assembly > Set as New Main Sub-Assembly from the pop-upmenu.

See also Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)

Removing objects from an assembly

To remove objects from an assembly:

1. Select the part or sub-assembly you want to remove.

2. Right-click and select Assembly > Remove from Assembly from the pop-up menu.

See also Assemblies (p. 70)

Highlighting objects in an assembly

Use the Inquire tool to check which objects belong to a particular assembly.

To highlight objects in an assembly:

1. Click  Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.

2. Select a part that belongs to an assembly.

Page 76: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 76/260

 

76 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

Tekla Structures highlights the other parts that belong to the same assembly. Thefollowing colors are used:

See also Assemblies (p. 70)

Exploding an assembly

When you explode a nested assembly, Tekla Structures breaks the assembly hierarchy level bylevel, always starting from the highest level. You need to use the Explode command severaltimes to break a nested assembly back to single parts.

You can also explode sub-assemblies to single parts without breaking the entire assemblyhierarchy.

To explode an assembly:

1. Select the assembly or sub-assembly you want to explode.

2. Do one of the following:

• To explode the entire assembly, right-click and select Assembly > Explode from

the pop-up menu.

• To only explode the sub-assembly, right-click and select Assembly > Explode Sub-

Assembly from the pop-up menu.

See also Assemblies (p. 70)

 Assembly examples

Column corbel A column corbel is fabricated in one workshop, and then attached to the column in anotherworkshop. Model the corbel as a sub-assembly of the column. Then create an assemblydrawing for each workshop: one assembly drawing showing how the corbel is welded together,another assembly drawing showing how the corbel and the other part are welded to the column.

Object type Highlight color

Concrete - main part magentaConcrete - secondary part cyan

Reinforcement blue

Steel part - main part orange

Steel part - secondary part yellow

Page 77: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 77/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 77

Creating and Modifying Structures

Complex truss Model the halves of a complex truss as assemblies. Create assembly drawings for the workshopto fabricate the truss halves. Then create another assembly drawing showing how the halvesshould be joined on site.

Built-up profile In a frame of built-up columns and beams, each built-up profile can be a sub-assembly. You cancreate an assembly drawing showing the entire frame, and separate drawings showing how thecolumns and beams are constructed.

See also Assemblies (p. 70)

Assembly drawing

3.5 Concrete parts

This section explains how to create concrete parts.

See also Creating a pad footing (p. 78)

Creating a strip footing (p. 78)

Creating a concrete column (p. 78)

Creating a concrete beam (p. 79)Creating a concrete polybeam (p. 79)

Drawing 2, Workshop 2

Drawing 1, Workshop 1

Page 78: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 78/260

 

78 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

Creating a concrete slab (p. 80)

Creating a concrete panel (p. 81)

Creating a pad footing

To create a pad footing:

1. Optional: Modify the pad footing properties.

2. Click the Create pad footing icon.

3. Pick the pad footing position.

See also Pad footing properties (p. 222)

Creating a strip footing

To create a strip footing:

1. Optional: Modify the strip footing properties.

2. Click the Create strip footing icon.

3. Pick the points you want the footing to go through.

4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the footing.

See also Strip footing properties (p. 223)

Creating a concrete column

To create a concrete column:

1. Optional: Modify the concrete column properties.

2. Click the Create concrete column icon.

3. Pick the position of the column.

Tekla Structures creates the column at the level that you defined in the Concrete

Column Properties dialog box.

Page 79: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 79/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 79

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Concrete column properties (p. 224)

Creating a concrete beam

To create a concrete beam:

1. Optional: Modify the concrete beam properties.

2. Click the Create concrete beam icon.

3. Pick the starting point.

4. Pick the end point.

See also Concrete beam properties (p. 225)

Creating a concrete polybeam

A polybeam can contain straight and curved segments. You can also create concrete bent plateswith this command.

To create a concrete polybeam:

1. Optional: Modify the concrete beam properties.

2. Click the Create concrete polybeam icon.

3. Pick the points you want the beam to go through.

4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the polybeam.

Page 80: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 80/260

 

80 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Polybeam chamfers (p. 106)

Concrete beam properties (p. 225)

Polybeam length calculation

Creating a concrete slab

When you create a concrete slab, the profile you use defines the thickness of the slab and thepicked points define the shape. The corners of the slab can be chamfered.

To create a concrete slab:

1. Optional: Modify the concrete slab properties.

2. Click the Create concrete slab icon.

3. Pick the starting point.

4. Pick the corner points of the slab.

5. Pick the starting point again, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

See also Creating a round slab (p. 80)

Concrete slab properties (p. 225)

Creating a round slabTo create a round slab:

1. Create a square slab with sides equal to the diameter of the round slab you want tocreate.

2. Select the slab.3. Double-click a handle to display the Chamfer Properties dialog box.

4. Select the round chamfer symbol from the list box.

5. Type the chamfer radius in the x field.

6. Click  Modify.

7. Repeat steps 3–5 for each corner.

Page 81: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 81/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 81

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Creating a concrete slab (p. 80)

Concrete slab properties (p. 225)

Chamfers (p. 104)

Creating a concrete panel

To create a concrete panel:1. Optional: Modify the concrete panel properties.

2. Click the Create concrete panel icon.

3. Pick the points you want the panel to go through.

4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.

5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the panel.

See also Concrete panel properties

Chamfers (p. 104)

3.6 Cast units

The concrete structures in Tekla Structures are modeled as single parts. By default, each part isconsidered a separate cast unit. For construction purposes you may need to merge severalconcrete parts into one cast unit. For example, a single cast unit could consist of a column withcorbels.

You need to specify which parts form the cast unit. Cast units can include reinforcement, aswell as concrete parts.

The main part in a concrete cast unit is the one with the largest volume of concrete. You canchange the main part in a cast unit.

See also Creating a cast unit (p. 82)

Adding objects to cast units (p. 82)

Removing objects from a cast unit (p. 83)

Page 82: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 82/260

 

82 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

Highlighting objects in a cast unit (p. 83)

Exploding a cast unit (p. 83)

Defining the cast unit type (p. 83)

Casting direction (p. 84)

Creating a cast unit

To create a cast unit:

1. Click  Modeling > Cast Unit > Create.

2. Select the objects you want to include in the cast unit.

3. Click the middle mouse button to create the cast unit.

See also Cast units (p. 81)

 Adding objects to cast units

This section explains how to add objects to a cast unit.

See also Cast units (p. 81)

Adding concrete objects to a cast unit (p. 82)

Adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit (p. 82)

Changing the cast unit main part (p. 82)

 Adding concrete objects to a cast unitTo add concrete objects to a cast unit:

1. Click  Modeling > Cast Unit > Add to.

2. Select the objects you want to add.3. Select an object in the cast unit.

See also Adding objects to cast units (p. 82)

 Adding non-concrete objects to a cast uni tUse the Add as Sub-Assembly command when adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit.This applies to anything that is not concrete, such as steel parts and insulation.

To add a non-concrete part to a cast unit:

1. Ensure that the Select components selection switch is active.

2. Click  Modeling > Assembly > Add as Sub-Assembly.

3. Select the non-concrete part you want to add.4. Select the cast unit to which you want to add the part.

See also Adding objects to cast units (p. 82)

Changing the cast unit main partTo change the main part in a cast unit:

1. Optional: To check what is currently the main part of the cast unit, click Tools > Inquire

> Assembly Objects.

2. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.

3. Select the new main part.

4. Right-click and select Set as New Main Part of Assembly from the pop-up menu.

Page 83: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 83/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 83

Creating and Modifying Structures

See also Adding objects to cast units (p. 82)

Removing objects from a cast unit

To remove objects from a cast unit:

1. Click  Modeling > Cast Unit > Remove From.2. Select the objects you want to remove.

See also Cast units (p. 81)

Highlighting objects in a cast unit

Use the Inquire tool to check which objects belong to a particular cast unit.

To highlight objects in a cast unit:

1. Click  Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.

2. Select a part that belongs to a cast unit.

Tekla Structures highlights the other parts that belong to the same cast unit. Thefollowing colors are used:

See also Cast units (p. 81)

Exploding a cast unit

To explode a cast unit:

1. Click  Modeling > Cast Unit > Explode.

2. Select an object in the cast unit you want to explode.

See also Cast units (p. 81)

Defining the cast unit type

Tekla Structures checks the cast unit type of the cast unit main part each time you create ormodify a cast unit. Tekla Structures does not mix precast and cast-in-place parts inside a castunit.

To define whether a concrete part is precast or cast in place:

1. Double-click a concrete part to open the concrete part properties dialog box.

2. Go to the Cast unit tab.

3. In the Cast unit type list box, select Precast or Cast in place.

4. Click  Modify to save the changes.

See also Cast units (p. 81)

Object type Highlight color

Concrete - main part magenta

Concrete - secondary part cyan

Reinforcement blue

Steel part - main part orange

Steel part - secondary part yellow

Page 84: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 84/260

 

84 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Creating and Modifying Structures

Casting direction

To indicate the casting direction of a concrete part, you can define which part face you want tohave on top of the casting form. The top-in-form face is displayed in the front view of adrawing.

Tekla Structures highlights the top-in-form face in red:

See also Cast units (p. 81)

Defining the casting direction of a part (p. 84)

Defin ing the casting di rection of a partTo define the casting direction of a concrete part:

1. Select a concrete part.

2. Right-click and select Cast Unit > Set Top in Form Face.

3. Select the part face that will face upwards in the form.

See also Casting direction (p. 84)

Showing the top-in-form faceTo display the top-in-form face of a concrete part:

1. Select a concrete part.

2. Right-click and select Cast Unit > Show Top in Form Face.

See also Casting direction (p. 84)

In drawings, use the Fixed coordinate system to show the top-in-formface in the front view.

To hide the top-in-form face again, right-click the view and selectUpdate Window from the pop-up menu.

Page 85: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 85/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 85

Detailing Structures

4 Detailing Structures

This section explains how to create details using Tekla Structures. It also gives you sometechniques for fine-tuning part shapes.

Contents • Bolts (p. 85)

• Holes (p. 89)

• Welds (p. 91)

• Surface treatment (p. 95)

• Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)

• Combining parts (p. 116)

•Splitting parts (p. 117)

4.1 Bolts

To create bolts, you can either create a single bolt group or apply a component thatautomatically creates bolt groups.

Page 86: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 86/260

 

86 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

For more information on using components to automatically create bolt groups, see Definingbolts and welds in the Detailing Manual.

You can create different part marks for holes and bolts in drawings.

You cannot use bolt elements (such as screws, washers, and nuts) while creating holes, as TeklaStructures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes.

See also Creating a bolt group (p. 86)

Creating a single bolt (p. 88)

Changing or adding bolted parts (p. 88)

The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs

Creating a bolt group

To create a bolt group:

1. Optional: Modify the bolt properties.

2. Click  Detailing > Bolts > Create Bolts.

3. Select the main part, to which the secondary parts will be bolted.

4. Select the secondary parts.

5. Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting parts.

6. Pick a point, which is the bolt group origin.

7. Pick a second point to indicate the bolt group x direction.

See also Bolts (p. 85)

Bolt properties (p. 227)

Bolt group shape (p. 86)

Bolt group position (p. 87)

Bolt offsets (p. 88)

Bolt group shapeYou have the following options for bolt group shape:

• Array for rectangular

• Circle for circular

• xy list for any shape

Tekla Structures uses the values of the Bolt dist X and Bolt dist Y fields to determine howmany bolts the bolt group contains, as shown in the table below:

You can also create a new bolt group by modifying an existing one. Inmost cases it is easier to create bolt groups by applying a component thatincludes bolt groups.

To create new bolts by modifying an existing bolt group:

1. Apply a component.

2. Explode the component.

3. Modify the bolt group.

Page 87: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 87/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 87

Detailing Structures

Examples

See also Creating a bolt group (p. 86)

Bolt group positionTekla Structures determines the location of the bolt group using the following values:

• Bolt group x axis

• Work plane

Shape Bolt dist X Bolt dist Y

Array Spacing between bolts, in the xdirection of the bolt group.

Spacing between bolts, in the ydirection of the bolt group.

Circle Number of bolts. Diameter of the bolt group.

xy list x coordinate of each bolt, fromthe bolt group point of origin.

y coordinate of each bolt, from thebolt group point of origin.

Bolt group shape Dimensions Picture

Array Bolt dist X: 150

Bolt dist Y: 100

Circle Number of bolts: 6

Diameter: 100

xy list Bolt dist X: 75 175 250

Bolt dist Y: 75 -50 0

Page 88: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 88/260

 

88 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

Dimensions are relative to the bolt group origin , which is the first point you pick whencreating a bolt group. Tekla Structures sets the x direction of a bolt group using the secondpoint picked.

It is important that the points you pick to create the bolt group are close enough to the parts youwant to connect.

See also Creating a bolt group (p. 86)

Bolt offsetsYou can use offsets to change the position of the bolt group. Offsets move the bolt group bymoving the x axis of the bolt group.

The starting point values Dx, Dy and Dz move the first end of the bolt group, relative to the boltgroup x axis. The end point values move the second end of the bolt group.

• A positive Dx value moves the starting point towards the end point.

• Dy moves the end point perpendicular to the bolt group x axis on the current work plane.

• Dz moves the end point perpendicular to the current work plane.

Example An example bolt group with the Dx starting point set to 75:

See also Creating a bolt group (p. 86)

Creating a single bolt

To create a single bolt:

1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.

2. Under Bolt group, select Array from the Shape list box.3. In the Bolt dist X and Bolt dist Y fields, type 0.

4. Click  Apply to save the changes.

5. Create the bolt the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions onthe status bar.

See also Bolts (p. 85)

Bolt properties (p. 227)

Creating a bolt group (p. 86)

Changing or adding bolted parts

To change the parts a bolt group connects to:

Page 89: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 89/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 89

Detailing Structures

1. Click  Detailing > Bolts > Edit Bolted Parts.

2. When prompted, reselect the main and secondary parts.

Tekla Structures automatically updates bolt length to suit these changes.

See also Bolts (p. 85)

4.2 Holes

Tekla Structures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes. Before creating holes,you need to change some of the properties in the Bolt Properties dialog box.

If you want to create only holes without any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes:

You can create the following types of holes:

• Round

• Oversized

• Slotted

• Tapped

See also Creating round holes (p. 89)

Creating oversized holes (p. 90)

Creating slotted holes (p. 90)

Creating round holes

Tekla Structures calculates the diameter of a round hole as the sum of Bolt size and Tolerance.

To create round holes:1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.

2. Optional: Modify the hole properties.

3. If you do not want to create any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes.

4. Click  Apply to save the changes.

5. Create the holes the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions onthe status bar.

See also Holes (p. 89)

Creating a bolt group (p. 86)

Page 90: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 90/260

 

90 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

Creating slot ted holes

To create slotted holes:

1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.

2. To indicate which parts should be slotted, select the desired Parts with slotted holes check boxes.

Tekla Structures counts the pieces of steel from the head of the bolt down. For example,if you select the second check box from the head of the bolt, Tekla Structures slots thesecond piece of steel from the head of the bolt.

3. If you do not want to create any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes.

4. In the Hole type list box, select Slotted.

5. Enter the allowance for the slotted hole in the x and y directions of the hole group usingthe Slotted hole X or Slotted hole Y fields.

6. Optional: In the Rotate slots list box, select Even or Odd to rotate alternate holes by 90degrees.

7. Click  Apply to save the changes.

8. Create the holes the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions onthe status bar.

See also Holes (p. 89)

Creating a bolt group (p. 86)

Creating oversized holes

To create oversized holes:

Tolerance

Slotted hole X or Y

Bolt size

Crossing slotted holes to odd or even parts

Parallel slotted holes

Page 91: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 91/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 91

Detailing Structures

1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.

2. Select the desired Parts with slotted holes check boxes to indicate which plies of theconnection get oversized holes.

3. If you do not want to create any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes.

4. In the Hole type list box, select Oversized.

5. In the Oversize field, enter the allowance for the oversized hole.You can also use a negative value to create smaller (tapped) holes.

6. Click  Apply to save the changes.

7. Create the holes the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions onthe status bar.

See also Holes (p. 89)

Creating a bolt group (p. 86)

4.3 WeldsYou can either create a weld manually, or use a component that automatically creates welds.

The following types of welds can be created manually:

• Weld between parts

Tekla Structures welds two parts together using the weld position defined in the Weld

Properties dialog box. The length of the weld depends on the length of the connectionbetween the welded parts.

• Polygon weld

You define the exact position of the weld by picking the points you want the weld totraverse.

• Single-part weld

Tekla Structures creates a weld to a single part, without connecting any other parts.

See also Creating a weld between parts (p. 91)

Creating a polygon weld (p. 93)

Creating a weld to a part (p. 94)

Weld preparation (p. 94)

Creating a weld between parts

To weld parts together:

1. Optional: Modify the weld properties.

2. Click  Detailing > Weld > Create Weld between Parts.

3. Select the part to weld to.

If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the main part of the assembly.

4. Select the part to be welded.

If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the secondary part of the assembly.

Page 92: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 92/260

 

92 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

See also Welds (p. 91)

Weld properties (p. 229)

Weld position (p. 92)

Weld size prefixes (p. 93)

Using welds to create assemblies (p. 72)

Weld positionYou define the position of a weld relative to the work plane. The type and position of the partsto be welded affect the position of the weld.

The options for weld position are:

• x

• y

• z

These can all be in a positive or negative direction. Tekla Structures creates the weld on theface or side of the part that faces in the selected direction (x, y, or z).

Example The following image shows welds in different positions. If there are no faces that touch in thespecified direction, Tekla Structures places the weld relative to the center point of thesecondary part.

See also Creating a weld between parts (p. 91)

Main part

Secondary part

Page 93: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 93/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 93

Detailing Structures

Weld size prefixesThe weld size prefix is shown in drawings, but only if the Size checkbox is also selected.

The following table describes the standard ISO 2553 prefixes:

See also Creating a weld between parts (p. 91)

Creating a polygon weld

To weld parts together using a polygon:

1. Click  Detailing > Weld > Create Polygon Weld.

2. Select the part to weld to.

If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the main part of the assembly.

3. Select the part to be welded.

If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the secondary part of the assembly.

4. Pick the starting and end point, or alternatively, pick the points you want the weld to gothrough.

5. Click the middle mouse button to create the weld.

Prefix Descriptiona Design throat thickness

s Penetration throat thickness

z Leg length

Page 94: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 94/260

 

94 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

See also Welds (p. 91)

Using welds to create assemblies (p. 72)

Creating a weld to a part

To create a weld to a part, without connecting any other parts:

1. Click  Detailing > Weld > Create Weld to Part.

2. Select the part that you want to weld.

3. Pick the starting and end point, or alternatively, pick the points you want the weld to gothrough.

4. Click the middle mouse button to create the weld.

Example Use the Create Weld to Part command to weld seams in tubular sections:

See also Welds (p. 91)

Weld preparation

When parts are prepared for welding, their edges can be beveled to produce a groove for theweld. You can define the angle of bevels and grooves.

You can either prepare a part for welding manually, or apply a component that does itautomatically.

See also Welds (p. 91)

Manually preparing a part for welding (p. 94)

Welded connections

Manually preparing a part for weldingBefore you start, create a cutting part and position it through the part you want to cut.

To manually prepare a part to be welded:

1. Click  Detailing > Weld > Prepare Part for Welding.

2. Select the part that you want to cut.

To model tubular sections with visible seams, use the SPD profile.

To prevent automatic weld preparation, set the variableXS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID to TRUE in your environmentinitialization file.

Page 95: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 95/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 95

Detailing Structures

3. Select the cutting part.

See also Weld preparation (p. 94)

4.4 Surface treatment

Use the surface treatment tools to add surface treatment to parts. Surface treatment for concreteparts include flat finishes, surface mixes, and tiles. Surface treatment for steel parts includefire-proofing and unpainted areas, for example. Surface treatments are visible only in rendered

views.

When you redefine the properties of a part (e.g. you change the size of a part), Tekla Structuresautomatically modifies the surface treatment to fit the part.

When you create overlapping surface treatments, the smaller surface treatment overrides thelarger one. The overlapping area is recognized in reports: only the topmost (visible) surfacetreatment is calculated.

The part to be cut

The cutting part

Cuts are displayed using dash-and-dot lines

Page 96: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 96/260

 

96 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

See also Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)

Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)

Creating new surface treatment options (p. 99)

Tiled surface treatment (p. 100)

Modifying surface treatment properties

To define the properties of a surface treatment:

1. Click  Detailing > Properties > Surface Treatment... to open the Surface Treatment

Properties dialog box.

2. In the Type list box, select the type of surface treatment to use.

3. In the Surface treatment name list box, select the specific surface treatment.

4. Click the Select... to select a material from the catalog.

5. Enter the Thickness of the surface treatment.

6. Set the Color to use to display the surface treatment in rendered views.7. In the At depth list box, select the location of the surface treatment. The options are

Middle, Front, and Behind.

8. Optional: To define the properties of a tiled surface treatment:

a On the Attributes tab, select Tile surface from the Type list box.

b On the Pattern tab, select the pattern from the Pattern type list box.

c The Definition table lists the properties of the pattern type.

9. Click  Apply or OK to save the surface treatment properties.

See also Surface treatment (p. 95)

 Adding surface treatment to partsThis section explains how to add surface treatment to a part.

See also Surface treatment (p. 95)

Adding surface treatment to a selected area (p. 97)

Adding surface treatment to a part face (p. 97)

Adding surface treatment to all faces of a part (p. 97)

Adding surface treatment to cut faces (p. 97)

Surface treatment on chamfered parts (p. 98)

Surface treatment on parts with openings and recesses (p. 98)

Page 97: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 97/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 97

Detailing Structures

 Adding surface treatment to a selected areaTo add surface treatment to a selected area on the face of a part:

1. Click  Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To Selected Area on Part Face.

2. Pick the origin of the surface treatment.

3. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the surface treatment.

4. Select an area of the part face to apply the surface treatment to.a Move the mouse cursor over a part. The faces that you can select appear in blue.

b Select the part face.

c Pick three or more points on the part face to define a polygonal area.

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)

Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)

 Adding surface treatment to a part faceTo add surface treatment to the entire face of a part:

1. Click  Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To Part Face.

2. Pick the origin of the surface treatment.3. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the surface treatment.

4. Select the part to apply the surface treatment to.

a Move the mouse cursor over a part. The faces that you can select appear in blue.

b Select the part face.

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)

Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)

 Adding surface treatment to all faces of a partTo add surface treatment to all faces of a part:

1. Click  Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To All Faces of Part.2. Select the part to apply the surface treatment to.

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)

Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)

 Adding surface treatment to cut facesTo add surface treatment to cut faces:

1. Click  Detailing > Create Surface Treatment, and then select either To Part Face or To

Selected Area on Part Face.

2. Pick the origin of the surface treatment.

3. Pick the direction.4. Select the cut face to apply the surface treatment to:

Page 98: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 98/260

 

98 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

5. If you are using the To Selected Area on Part Face command, pick the points to definethe area of the surface treatment.

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)

Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)

Surface treatment on chamfered partsTake these things into account when adding surface treatment to chamfered parts:

• Surface treatment does not work on sketched profiles with chamfers.

• Add surface treatment before chamfering the part. If surface treatment is applied to a

chamfered part, the surface treatment chamfer cannot be modified later on.

• The chamfers for the main part and surface treatment are separate. Modifying the mainpart chamfer does not affect the surface treatment chamfer.

• The orientation of unsymmetric chamfers depends on the face where it was created (such

as top, bottom, left, or right). To change the orientation of an unsymmetric chamfer, youmust swap the chamfer's x and y values.

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)

Surface treatment on parts w ith openings and recessesTo force Tekla Structures to consider openings and recesses in parts when adding surfacetreatment, select the Cut by father part cuts checkbox in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.

Page 99: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 99/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 99

Detailing Structures

See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)

Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)

Creating new surface treatment options

You can add new options to the Surface treatment name list box in the Surface TreatmentProperties dialog box.

To create new surface treatment options:

1. Open the product_finishes.dat file using any text editor.

The file is located in the ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder.

The first section of the file defines the available types of surface treatment. Do not editthis section:

The green surface treatment has the Cut by father part cuts check boxselected

The tiled surface treatment is not cut by the cut in the part: Cut by father

part cuts is not selected.

If you use the To All Faces of Part command and select the Cut by

father part cuts checkbox, Tekla Structures automatically adds surfacetreatment also to the cut faces.

This section is for advanced users.

Page 100: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 100/260

 

100 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

2. Go to the sections that define the options for each type of surface treatment:

3. Add rows to define new options.

a Define the surface treatment type. For example, 1 for concrete finish.

b Define a code for the surface treatment option. For example, MF for MagnesiumFloat.

c Define the full name of the surface treatment option. For example, MagnesiumFloat. Remember to enclose the name in double quotes " ".

4. Save the file.

See also Surface treatment (p. 95)

Tiled surface treatment

Tekla Structures includes complex tile and brick surface treatment options, such asbasketweave and herringbone patterns. Tiled surface treatment options are based on repeatingtile patterns that are stored in XML format.

See also Surface treatment (p. 95)

Creating new tile patterns (p. 100)

Example pattern definition (p. 101)

Creating new tile patternsTo create new tile patterns:

1. Open the TilePatternCatalog.xml file using any text editor.

The file is located in the ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder.

2. Add a new <TilePattern> element to the file.

// Product finishes

// -------------------------

//

// Type : Type of surfacing

// 1 = concrete finish

// 2 = special mix// 3 = tile surface

// 4 = steel finishes

// =========================================

// *** Concrete Finish

// =========================================

// WET FINISH

// ----------

1 MF "Magnesium Float"

1 SMF "Smooth Magnesium Float"

1 WT "Wet Trowel"

This section is for advanced users.

Page 101: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 101/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 101

Detailing Structures

The <TilePattern> element must have <HOffset> and <VOffset> elements and atleast one <Tile> element. Other elements are optional.

3. Repeat adding <TilePattern> elements for all the patterns you want to define.

4. Save the TilePatternCatalog.xml file.

See also Tiled surface treatment (p. 100)

Example pattern definition (p. 101)

Tile pattern definitions (p. 103)

Tile pattern elements (p. 104)

Example pattern definitionThis example explains how the Basketweave tile pattern is defined in theTilePatternCatalog.xml file.

The Basketweave pattern block is made up of eight tiles:

You may find it easier to copy one of the existing elements, and thenmodify it to suit your needs.

Tile width

Mortar width

VOffset

HOffset

Red marks indicate TileOrigin. Angle value for vertical tiles is 90

Page 102: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 102/260

 

102 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

The pattern is repeated in the x and y direction of the surface treatment, starting from the origin

of the surface treatment. You can run the pattern in different x directions:

In the TilePatternCatalog.xml file, the pattern is defined as follows:

Tile height

Mortar height

Page 103: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 103/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 103

Detailing Structures

The definition file uses the same symbols as the pattern definition table in the Surface

Treatment Properties dialog box:

See also Creating new tile patterns (p. 100)

Tile pattern definitions (p. 103)

Tile pattern elements (p. 104)

Tile pattern definitionsThe predefined tile patterns that are available in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog boxare stored in the following files:

See also Tiled surface treatment (p. 100)

The name of the pattern

The size of the pattern block in the x direction, after which the patternrepeats

The size of the pattern block in the y direction, after which the pattern

repeats

File Description

TilePatternCatalog.xml • Contains the tile pattern definitions.

• Located in the ..\Tekla

Structures\<version>\environments

\<environment>\system folder.

TilePatternCatalog.dtd • Document Type Declaration (DTD) file that

defines the elements allowed in the

TilePatternCatalog.xml file.

• Located in the same folder as the

TilePatternCatalog.xml file.

Thumbnail images • The images that appear in the Picture field in the

Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.

• Located in the ..\Tekla

Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps  folder.

• Filenames identify the pattern types. For example,

herringbone.bmp illustrates the herringbonepattern type.

Page 104: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 104/260

 

104 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

Tile pattern elementsThe TilePatternCatalog.xml file can contain the following elements:

See also Tiled surface treatment (p. 100)

4.5 Fine-tuning part shape

This section describes the various tools you can use to fine-tune the shape of a part.

See also Chamfers (p. 104)

Fittings (p. 108)

Cuts (p. 109)

Modifying the shape of a polygon (p. 112)

Warping concrete parts (p. 113)

Cambering parts (p. 115)

Shortening and lengthening parts (p. 115)

Combining parts (p. 116)

Splitting parts (p. 117)

Chamfers

Chamfers are modeling details that can be used to refine the shape of parts for aesthetic,practical, and manufacturing reasons. In Tekla Structures, you can chamfer part corners andpart edges.

Limitations Only the following parts have corner chamfers: contour plates, concrete slabs, and parts thatyou create by picking more than two points (strip footings, steel and concrete polybeams, andconcrete panels).

The end points of a part do not have corner chamfers. The handles that you select must be atcorner points or between two segments of a part.

Element Description

TilePatternCatalog The container for tile patterns. Required.

TilePattern Tile pattern element. Required. This element can contain thefollowing elements listed in this table.

HOffset Horizontal offset of the tile pattern. Required.

VOffset Vertical offset of the tile pattern. Required.

Tile The individual tiles used in a tile pattern. At least onerequired.

Color Color of the tile or mortar, defined by the RGB values (0–255). Optional.

Parameter Creates an attribute for any element in the TilePattern.Optional.

Label The label that identifies a parameter in the dialog box.Optional.

TileOrigin The origin of an individual tile, defined from the origin of thepattern. Optional.

Page 105: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 105/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 105

Detailing Structures

See also Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)

Chamfering part corners (p. 105)

Chamfering part edges (p. 107)

Chamfering part corners

When Tekla Structures creates a part, by default it has a rectangular chamfer at each corner,which does not change the geometry of the part. You can modify the default chamfers.

To modify a corner chamfer:

1. Select the part.

2. Double-click the handle of any part corner.

The Chamfer Properties dialog box is displayed.

3. Modify the chamfer properties.

4. Select the handles of the part corners you want to modify.

5. Click  Modify.

See also Chamfers (p. 104)

Corner chamfer properties (p. 232)

Corner chamfer types and dimensions (p. 105)

Polybeam chamfers (p. 106)

Corner chamfer types and dimensionsStraight chamfers can have different dimensions in two directions. Tekla Structures only usesone dimension for curved chamfers.

The coordinates follow the part’s local coordinate system.

The table below describes the chamfer types and dimensions used with the Create Chamfer >

For Part Corner command.

Page 106: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 106/260

 

106 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

See also Chamfering part corners (p. 105)

Polybeam chamfersBy default, Tekla Structures places a rectangular corner chamfer between each polybeamsegment. You can modify the default chamfers.

Tekla Structures shows the status of polybeam chamfers using the following colors:

Type Icon Dimensions

None x: not used

y: not used

Line x:the distance in the x coordinate direction from thecorner

y: the distance in the y coordinate direction from thecorner

Rounding x: the radius

y: not used

Arc x: the radius

y: not used

Arc point x: not used

y: not used

Square The chamfer is perpendicular to the edges.

x: the distance in the x coordinate direction from thecorner

y: the distance in the y coordinate direction from thecorner

Square

parallel

The chamfer is parallel to the opposite edge.

x: the distance in the x coordinate direction from thecorner

y: the distance in the y coordinate direction from thecorner

Line and

arc

x (if smaller than y): the arc radius

x (if bigger than y): the distance in the x coordinatedirection from the corner

y (if smaller than x): the arc radius

y (if bigger than x): the distance in the y coordinatedirection from the corner

Page 107: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 107/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 107

Detailing Structures

See also Chamfering part corners (p. 105)

Chamfering part edgesTo chamfer the edge of a part:

1. Click  Detailing > Create Chamfer > For Part Edge.

2. Select the part you want to chamfer.

3. Pick a point where you want the chamfer to start on the part edge.

4. Pick a second point where you want the chamfer to end on the part edge.

Tekla Structures displays the chamfer in light blue color.

5. Optional: Modify the chamfer.

a Double-click the chamfer to open the Edge Chamfer Properties dialog box.b Modify the chamfer properties.

Color Description Example

Magenta Correct chamfer

Yellow Correct chamfer thatcannot be unfolded

Red Incorrect chamfer

To see the chamfer lines of polybeams, set the advanced optionXS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES to CHAMFERS.

Page 108: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 108/260

 

108 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

c Click  OK.

6. Right-click the view and select Redraw View.

Tekla Structures removes the chamfered edge.

See also Edge chamfer properties (p. 232)

Chamfers (p. 104)

Fittings

You can fit the end of a part to a plane by creating a straight cutting line between two points youpick.

You can use fittings to extend or shorten parts inside a component, which makes it easier tocreate connections, details, and so on. Do not use fittings to otherwise change the length of apart in the model.

A fitting adjusts the end of a beam on a plane, perpendicular to the view plane, which passesthrough the cutting line you pick. Fittings cannot be used on contour plates.

See also Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)

Creating a fitting (p. 108)

Creating a fittingTo create a fitting:

1. Click  Detailing > Fit Part End.

2. Select the part you want to cut with a fitting.

3. Pick the first point of the cutting line.

4. Pick the second point of the cutting line.

Fitting symbol

Page 109: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 109/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 109

Detailing Structures

See also Fittings (p. 108)

Cuts

You can use cuts to shape a part. Do not use cuts for cutting the entire part end.

See also Cutting parts with a line (p. 111)

Cutting parts with a polygon (p. 111)

Cutting parts with another part (p. 112)

Hiding cut lines in a view (p. 240)

Cutting efficiently (p. 240)

Line cutsA line cut cuts the end of a beam on a plane that passes through the line you pick. TeklaStructures displays the cut line using dash-and-dot lines.

By default, line cuts do not affect beam length in NC files. For more information on how tochange this, see Fittings affect NC data.

See also Cutting parts with a line (p. 111)

Polygon cutsA polygon cut cuts a part using a polygonal shape. Tekla Structures displays the cut using dash-

and-dot lines. You must create cuts in a plane view.

Do not apply a second fitting on the same part end, because then TeklaStructures will ignore the first fitting. This happens if you use the Fit

Part End command for cutting and try to make two cuts on the same partend. In situations like this, use the Cut Part commands instead.

Cuts are displayed using dash-and-dot lines

Cut lines are hidden

Page 110: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 110/260

 

110 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

See also Cutting parts with a polygon (p. 111)

Part cutsYou can cut a part using another part. Tekla Structures displays the cut using dash-and-dotlines.

You can cut parts that already have cuts. This can be useful, for example, when you want tocreate more sophisticated cut shapes.

Polygon-shaped cut

Cut lines are hidden

You should always define the polygon so that there is some tolerancebetween the edges. If the edge of a cutting polygon is in exactly the sameposition as the edge of the part to be cut, it can be unclear whether theedge should be cut away.

Page 111: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 111/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 111

Detailing Structures

See also Cutting parts with another part (p. 112)

Cutting parts with a lineUse line cuts to shape the end of a beam or column.

To cut a part with a line:

1. Click  Detailing > Cut Part > With Line.2. Select the part you want to cut.

3. Pick the first point of the cutting line.

4. Pick the second point of the cutting line.

5. Pick the side you want to remove.

See also Cuts (p. 109)

Line cuts (p. 109)

Cutting parts with a polygonTo cut a part using a polygonal shape:

1. Ensure that the work plane is on the plane you are cutting on.For example, if you are creating a polygonal cut on the yz plane, you should temporarilyset your work plane to the yz plane as well.

2. Click  Detailing > Cut Part > With Polygon.

3. Select the part you want to cut.

4. Pick positions to outline the polygon to be used for cutting.

5. To close the polygon, click the middle mouse button or click Edit > Finish Polygon

Input.

See also Cuts (p. 109)

Polygon cuts (p. 109)

Cuts are displayed using dash-and-dot lines

Cut lines are hidden

Do not create cuts with the same planes or vertices. This makes itunclear what should be cut away.

Page 112: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 112/260

 

112 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

Cutting parts with another partBefore you start, create a cutting part and position it through the part you want to cut.

To cut a part with another part:

1. Click  Detailing > Cut Part > With Another Part

2. Select the part you want to cut.

3. Select the cutting part.

Tekla Structures cuts the selected main part. The part cut does not affect other parts.

4. Delete the cutting part.

a Ensure that the Select cuts and fittings selection switch is off.

b Select the cutting part and press Delete.

See also Cuts (p. 109)

Part cuts (p. 110)

Modifying the shape of a polygon

You can modify the shape of the following polygonal parts: steel and concrete polybeams,contour plates, concrete slabs, concrete panels, and strip footings.

To modify the shape of a polygonal part:

1. Select the part you want to modify.

2. Click  Detailing > Modify Polygon Shape.

3. Pick an existing corner (1).

4. Pick new corners for the polygon (2, 3).

5. Pick another existing corner (4).

6. Pick the corner to remove (5).

See also Moving an object

Moving an object using drag-and-drop

Part position (p. 57)

Alternatively, move the handles using drag-and-drop or the Move command.

Page 113: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 113/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 113

Detailing Structures

Warping concrete parts

Use the following methods to warp concrete parts:

See also Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)

Warping a beam using deformation angles (p. 113)

Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfers (p. 113)

Warping a Floor Bay (66) slab (p. 114)

Warping a beam using deformation angles

To warp a beam:

1. Double-click the beam to open the Beam properties dialog box.

2. Go to the Deforming tab.

3. In the Start field, enter the angle of the beam at its start point, relative to the partreference line.

4. In the End field, enter the angle of the beam at its end point, relative to the part referenceline.

For example, to warp the beam 45 degrees at the end point, type 0 in the Start anglefield and 45 in the End angle field.

5. Click  Modify to warp the beam.

6. Click  OK to close the dialog box.

See also Warping concrete parts (p. 113)

Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfersBefore you start, create a concrete slab by using the Create concrete slab command.

To warp a concrete slab by moving the chamfers:

1. Double-click a chamfer to open the Chamfer Properties dialog box.

2. Modify the chamfer properties.

• To move the upper corner of the chamfer, use the dz1 field.

• To move the lower corner of the chamfer, use the dz2 field.

3. Click  Modify to warp the slab.

To Do this

Warp a concrete beam Use the deforming options in the partproperties dialog box.

Warp a concrete slab Move the chamfers.

Page 114: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 114/260

 

114 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

4. Click  OK to close the dialog box.

See also Warping concrete parts (p. 113)

Warping a Floor Bay (66) slabBefore you start, create a concrete slab by using the Modeling of floor bay (66) component.

To warp a Floor Bay (66) slab by moving chamfers:

1. Ensure that the Select components selection switch is on.

2. Select the chamfer you want to move.

For example, select the corner point of a slab component to warp that end of the slab:

3. Right-click and select Move Special > Linear from the pop-up menu.4. In the Move - Linear dialog box, type a value in the appropriate direction field.

For example, type 100 in the dZ field to lift that corner up 100 mm.

5. Click  Move.

Tekla Structures moves the point in the direction you selected, which warps the slabs.

6. Right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu to finish.

7. Ensure that the Select objects in components selection switch is on.

8. To see the warping angle of a single slab, double-click a slab to open the Beam

properties dialog box, and go to the Deforming tab.

• The Start field shows the warping angle at the start point of the part.

• The End field shows the warping angle at the end point of the part.

Page 115: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 115/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 115

Detailing Structures

See also Warping concrete parts (p. 113)

Cambering parts

You can use cambering to pre-camber parts, in other words, to curve long heavy sections that

will settle on site and become flat.Use cambering to show the natural camber of a prestressed part in a model. Cambering affectsthe position of cuts, skews, and embeds in the model.

Tekla Structures cambers parts in the local z direction.

See also Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)

Cambering a part (p. 115)

Cambering a part

To camber a part:1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.

2. Go to the Deforming tab.

3. In the Cambering field, define the degree of camber.

4. Click  Modify.

See also Cambering parts (p. 115)

Shortening and lengthening parts

Use the shortening functionality to make the drawing of a part longer or shorter than the part inthe model. This can be useful for adding length to concrete precast parts in the cast conditionwhile the model stays in the erected state. The most common use for this is to account forprestressing elastic shortening, where the part actually shrinks a fraction of an inch after castingand after the strands are cut.

When drawings are created, Tekla Structures decreases the true length of the part by the valuedefined in the Shortening field. Shortening is applied linearly along the length in drawings.

Shortening affects the dimensions of the part and dimensions to objects inside the part.Shortening does not affect the geometry of the actual objects inside the part, including thetemplate output.

The cambering functionality is available only in the Full and PrecastConcrete Detailing configurations.

Page 116: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 116/260

 

116 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

See also Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)

Shortening a part in drawings (p. 116)

Lengthening a part in drawings (p. 116)

Shortening a part in drawingsTo shorten a part in drawings:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.

2. Go to the Deforming tab.

3. In the Shortening field, define the degree of shortening.

4. Click  Modify.

See also Shortening and lengthening parts (p. 115)

Lengthening a part in drawingsTo have a concrete part lengthened in cast unit drawings, you must enter a negative value forshortening in the part properties dialog box.

To lengthen a part in drawings:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.

2. Go to the Deforming tab.

3. In the Shortening field, enter a negative value.

For example, -20 would result in a part that is cast 20 units longer than the part in the

model.

4. Click  Modify.

See also Shortening and lengthening parts (p. 115)

4.6 Combining parts

You can combine existing parts in Tekla Structures. This can be useful when you want to modelcomplex parts (such as folded plates) that are otherwise difficult to model, or when you want to

model prefabricated parts that are delivered to the workshop already attached to profiles.When you select the parts you want to combine, the part properties of the part that is selectedfirst are used for the combined part.

You can add the new combined part to another combined part. Cuts and fittings can also beapplied to combined parts.

See also Combining two parts into one (p. 116)

Attaching a part to another part (p. 117)

Combining two parts into one

To combine two parts into one:

The shortening functionality is available only in the Full and PrecastConcrete Detailing configurations.

Page 117: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 117/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 117

Detailing Structures

1. Click  Edit > Combine.

2. Select the first part.

3. Select the second part.

If the centerlines of the part are not in line with each other, the centerlines are combined bytaking the largest distance between the start and end points from both parts.

See also Combining parts (p. 116)

 Attaching a part to another part

To attach a part to another part:

1. Click  Detailing > Attach Part.

2. Select the part to attach to.

3. Select the part you want to attach.

See also Combining parts (p. 116)

4.7 Splitting parts

You can split a part into two parts in Tekla Structures.

You can use splitting with straight parts, curved beams without offsets, or normal and taperedreinforcing bar groups. You can also split plates and slabs by using a polygon. You cannot splitpolybeams.

Combining does not work for contour plates or polybeams.

When you combine parts, Tekla Structures retains the attached objectsand connections. Tekla Structures does not recreate connections in the

part that was selected first.

Page 118: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 118/260

 

118 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Detailing Structures

See also Splitting a straight or curved part (p. 118)

Splitting a plate or slab (p. 118)

Splitting a straight or curved part

To split a straight or curved part:

1. Click  Edit > Split.

2. Select the part you want to split.

3. Pick a point for the dividing line.

See also Splitting parts (p. 117)

Splitting a plate or slab

To split a plate or slab by using a polygon:

1. Click  Edit > Split.

2. Select the part you want to split.

3. Pick positions to outline the polygon to be used for splitting.

4. Click the middle mouse button to close the polygon and to split the part.

See also Splitting parts (p. 117)

When you pick the corner points of the polygon to be used for splitting,make sure the starting and end points are:

• outside of the part, and

• on the same side of the part.

If you split contour plates that have bolts, welds or surface treatments,check the result after splitting.

Page 119: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 119/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 119

Examining the Model

5 Examining the Model

This section describes a variety of tools you can use to view your model and ensure it does notcontain errors

Contents • Viewing the model (p. 119)

• Inquiring the model (p. 126)

• Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)

• Visualizing project status (p. 135)

• Checking the model (p. 142)

5.1 Viewing the model

To see your Tekla Structures model from virtually any angle, you can move and rotate themodel.

See also Zooming the model (p. 119)

Rotating the model (p. 121)

Moving the model (p. 122)

Flying through the model (p. 123)

Creating a clip plane (p. 124)Creating a screenshot (p. 124)

Zooming the model

The commands on the View > Zoom menu allow you to focus in on a particular area, or pull outfor a wider view. You can use a mouse, keyboard shortcuts, or a combination of both.

To zoom in or out in a model:

• Scroll with the mouse wheel.

Scroll forward to zoom in, and backward to zoom out.

Page 120: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 120/260

 

120 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

See also Viewing the model (p. 119)

Modifying the zoom settings (p. 120)

Zooming with keyboard shortcuts (p. 120)

Zooming with Magnifier (p. 120)

Modifying the zoom settingsTo modify zoom settings, do any of the following:

See also Zooming the model (p. 119)

Zooming with keyboard shortcutsTo zoom by using keyboard shortcuts:

1. Place the mouse pointer over the model.

2. Do one of the following:

• To zoom in, press Page Up.

• To zoom out, press Page Down.

See also Zooming the model (p. 119)

Zooming with Magnifier The Magnifier tool is useful when you need to keep a general view of the model open, andexamine particular areas in detail at the same time. Magnifier works only in wire frame views.

To zoom by using Magnifier:

1. Open a wire frame view of the model.

2. Create a zoom window.

a Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.

b In the View type list box, select Wire frame.

c Click  Modify.

d Click  View > Zoom > Create Zoom Window.

If you do not have a wheel mouse, use the commands on the View >

Zoom menu to zoom in or out in the model. For more information oneach command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

To Do this

Keep the center point of the view inthe middle of the view window

Click Tools > Options > Centered Zooms.

If this option is off, the mouse pointer positiondetermines the center point of zooming.

Define the zoom ratio when using a3-button mouse

Use the advanced optionXS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO.

Define the zoom ratio when scrolling Use the advanced optionXS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE.

Define the zoom ratio when scrollingand holding down the wheel

Use the advanced optionXS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE.

Page 121: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 121/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 121

Examining the Model

e Click a starting corner for the zoom window, and then drag the pointer to size thewindow.

3. Click the Magnifier icon.

As you move the pointer in the general view, the zoom window displays the area aroundthe pointer in detail.

4. To change the level of magnification, zoom in and out in the zoom window.

See also Zooming the model (p. 119)

Rotating the model

You can use the mouse, keyboard shortcuts, menu commands, or a combination of thesetechniques to rotate the model in rendered views. In wire frame views, only menu commandsand keyboard shortcuts can be used to rotate the model.

To rotate the model, use any of the following methods:

Page 122: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 122/260

 

122 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

See also Rotation settings (p. 213)

Viewing the model (p. 119)

Moving the model

To move the entire model, use any of the following methods:

To Do this

Rotate using the middle mousebutton

1. Hold down the Ctrl key and click and drag with themiddle mouse button to rotate the model.

2. To relocate the center of rotation, press v, and then

pick a position in the view.

Tekla Structures rotates the model around this viewpoint.

Rotate using the left mousebutton

1. Press Ctrl + R.

2. Pick a position in the view.

Tekla Structures rotates the model around this viewpoint.

3. Click and drag with the left mouse button to rotatethe model.

Rotate using menu commands orkeyboard shortcuts

• Click View > Rotate and select one of the

commands.

The center of rotation is fixed in the center of thework area.

For more information on each command, see thecorresponding menu tooltip.

Automatically set the rotationcenter

1. Click  Tools > Options > Automatic Rotation

Center to switch on automatic rotation centering.

2. Hold down the Ctrl key and click and drag with themiddle mouse button to rotate the model.

The rotation center is automatically set at thelocation you clicked.

Tip: When Automatic Rotation Center is switched

off, you can temporarily activate it by holdingdown Ctrl + Shift while you click and drag withthe middle mouse button.

Define a specific rotation angle 1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.

2. Type a rotation angle in the Rotation around Z orRotation around X field.

3. Click  Modify.

Page 123: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 123/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 123

Examining the Model

See also Viewing the model (p. 119)

Flying through the model

Using the Fly command, you can travel through a model, changing direction and varying thespeed as you go. You can also adjust the field of view setting, which can be useful when flyingin a tight space.

To fly through a model:1. Set view projection to Perspective.

a Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.

b In the Projection list box, select Perspective.

c Click  Modify.

2. Optional: Adjust the field of view setting.

a Click  Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.

b Modify the advanced option XS_RENDERED_FIELD_OF_VIEW.

c Click  OK.

3. Click  View > Fly.

4. Select a view. The mouse pointer changes into an arrow and a cross. The arrow indicatesthe current flying direction.

5. Drag the mouse to move around in the model.

• To change the flying direction, drag the mouse in the desired direction.

The flying speed grows exponentially when you are approaching the model from adistance.

• To move up or down, hold down Ctrl and drag the mouse forward or backward.

• To change the camera angle, scroll with the mouse wheel.

To Do this

Move the model using the middlemouse button

1. To activate the middle button pan, click Tools >

Options > Middle Button Pan, or Shift+M. Acheckmark appears next to the menu option if the

middle button pan is already active.2. Hold down the middle mouse button and drag the

model anywhere within the view window.

Move the model using the Pan command

1. Press P or click View > Move > Pan to activatedynamic panning,

The mouse pointer changes to a hand.

2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag themouse anywhere within the view window.

3. To stop panning, press Esc.

Move the model using keyboardshortcuts or menu commands

Do one of the following:

• Use the up, down, left and right arrows on the

keyboard.• Click View > Move and then select one of the

commands.

Page 124: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 124/260

 

124 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

• To fly in the in the direction of the camera angle, hold down Shift and scroll

forward or backward.

6. To stop flying, press Esc.

See also XS_RENDERED_FIELD_OF_VIEW

Viewing the model (p. 119)

Creating a clip plane

Clip planes enable you to focus in on the required detail in the model. You can create up to sixclip planes in any rendered model view.

To create a clip plane:

1. Click  View > Create Clip Plane.

2. Select a plane. The clip plane symbol appears in the model:

3. Repeat step 2 to create as many clip planes as needed.

4. To finish creating clip planes, press Esc.

5. To move a clip plane, click the clip plane symbol and drag it to a new location.

6. To delete a clip plane, click the clip plane symbol and press Delete.

See also Viewing the model (p. 119)

Creating a screenshot

A screenshot is a picture of a dialog box, view, or the entire Tekla Structures window. You canuse screenshots in posters, brochures, or other material to show projects carried out using TeklaStructures.

To create a high resolution screenshot of a rendered view:

1. Ensure that the view type is set to Rendered.2. Click  Tools > Screenshot > Custom...

Page 125: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 125/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 125

Examining the Model

3. To define which view to create the screenshot from, click Pick view and select a view.

4. Under Capture, select Rendered view.

5. Click  Options... The Screenshot Options dialog box appears.

6. Set the desired properties and click OK.

7. Click  Capture.

See also Creating a screenshot in Windows Vista (p. 125)

Screenshot settings (p. 214)

Creating a screenshot in Windows VistaDue to a performance problem in Windows Vista, the screenshot commands might not alwayswork properly. Use any of the following workarounds to solve this problem:

• Use the command Tools > Screenshot > Custom...

• Adjust the visual effects for best performance in the Performance Options dialog boxin Windows Vista.

• Use the built-in Snipping Tool in Windows Vista to capture screenshots.

See also Creating a screenshot (p. 124)

Saving a screenshot in bitmap formatBy default, screenshots are created as Portable Network Graphics (.png) files. You can alsosave a screenshot in bitmap (.bmp) format to use it, for example, as a custom componentthumbnail.

To save a screenshot in bitmap format:

1. Click  Tools > Screenshot > Custom...

2. Select Place on clipboard.

3. Click  Capture.

4. Paste the screenshot in your graphics editor and save it in .bmp format.

See also Creating a screenshot (p. 124)

Printing a screenshotYou can have Tekla Structures automatically print out a screenshot using the default printer.

To print a screenshot:

1. Click  Tools > Screenshot > Print Screenshot to activate automatic printing.

2. Click  Tools > Screenshot and select one of the commands:

• To capture the entire Tekla Structures window, select Main Frame.

• To capture the last dialog box displayed, select Dialog.

• To capture the active view, select View.

• To capture the active view without borders, select View without Borders.

See also Creating a screenshot (p. 124)

The software that you use to open the screenshot may have a limit for thenumber of pixels.

Page 126: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 126/260

 

126 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

5.2 Inquiring the model

Use the commands on the Tools > Inquire menu to display information about model objectsand model size.

See also Inquiring object properties (p. 126)Using the Custom Inquiry tool (p. 126)

Inquiring object properties

Use the Inquire object command to display the properties of a particular object, or a group of objects, within the model.

To inquire object properties:

1. Click  Tools > Inquire > Object.

2. Select an object.

Tekla Structures displays the object properties in a separate window.

See also Inquiring the model (p. 126)

Object property report templates (p. 126)

Object property report templatesWhen you view object properties using the Inquire object command, Tekla Structures uses thefollowing report templates:

You can modify these templates according to your needs. For more information on how to usetemplates, see the Template Editor user documentation.

See also Inquiring object properties (p. 126)

Using the Custom Inquiry toolUse the Custom Inquiry tool to display information of the selected model object in a separatewindow that you can drag and drop to any position on the screen. By default, the tool shows thetotal area, weight, and length of the selected model object.

To display object properties using the Custom Inquiry tool:

1. Click  Tools > Inquire > Custom Inquiry....

The Custom Inquiry dialog box appears.

2. Select a part.

Tekla Structures displays the part properties in the tool window.

See also Inquiring the model (p. 126)

Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry tool (p. 127)

Part type Template

Parts TS_Report_Inquire_Part.rpt

Assemblies TS_Report_Inquire_Assembly.rpt

Cast units TS_Report_Inquire_Cast_Unit.rpt

Welds TS_Report_Inquire_Welding.rpt

Reference models TS_Report_Inquire_Reference.rpt

Page 127: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 127/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 127

Examining the Model

Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool (p. 127)

Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry toolYou can define what information is displayed in the Custom Inquiry dialog box.

To modify the contents of the tool window:

1. Click  Tools > Inquire > Custom Inquiry....The Custom Inquiry dialog box appears.

2. Click  Manage contents...

The Manage Contents dialog box appears. The Attributes list contains all of theavailable attributes. The Contents of Custom Inquiry list contains the attributes that aredisplayed in the tool window.

3. Optional: Define which attributes are shown in the Attributes list.

• To modify the default attributes, edit the InquiryTool.config file in the

..\Tekla

Structures\<version>\environments\common\macros\modelin

g\InquiryToolAttributes folder.

• To create new calculated attributes, click Add…. You can use standardmathematical symbols (+, -, *, and /) to form equations.

• To modify the calculated attributes, click Edit....

4. Define which attributes are shown in the tool window.

• To add more attributes to the tool window, click an item in the Attributes list and

then click the right arrow button.

• To remove attributes from the tool window, click an item in the Contents of

Custom Inquiry list and then click the left arrow button.

• To change the order of the attributes, use the Up and Down buttons.

• To change the formula of an attribute, click the down arrow and select a different

formula (SUM, AVERAGE, MAX, or MIN) from the list box.

See also Using the Custom Inquiry tool (p. 126)

Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool (p. 127)

 Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool

Use the InquiryTool.config file to control which attributes are shown as defaultattributes in the Manage Contents dialog box in the Custom Inquiry tool. By default, the filecontains 65 attributes. The attributes refer to the contentattributes_global.lst filelocated in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\nt\TplEd\settings folder.

To add new attributes to the InquiryTool.config file:

1. Open the InquiryTool.config file in any standard text editor.

The file is located in the ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\environments\common\macros\modeling\I

nquiryToolAttributes folder.

2. Copy the entire contents of [ATTR_CONTENT_??] to the end of the file.

3. Change the position number of the new attribute.

For example, change [ATTR_CONTENT_??] to [ATTR_CONTENT_66].

This section is for advanced users.

Page 128: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 128/260

 

128 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

4. Modify the NAME, DISPLAY_NAME, DATATYPE, UNIT, and DECIMAL values of the newattribute. Use the attribute names and definitions that are included in thecontentattributes_global.lst file.

5. Change the TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT value to reflect the total number of attributes in thefile.

For example, change TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT=65 to TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT=66.

6. Save the file.

See also Using the Custom Inquiry tool (p. 126)

5.3 Showing and hiding objects

The visibility of objects in a view depends on the following settings:

• work area

• view depth

• view settings

• view filter

• object representation settings

Work area and view depth are like two virtual boxes. Objects that have their reference linepartially or totally inside both boxes are visible. Newly created objects are also visible outsidethe view depth but never outside the work area. When you redraw a view, only the objectsinside the view depth are displayed.

See also Defining which objects are displayed (p. 128)

Representation options (p. 128)

Hiding selected parts (p. 130)

Hiding unselected parts (p. 131)

Showing parts with exact lines (p. 131)

Showing and hiding assemblies (p. 131)

Showing and hiding components (p. 132)

Object groups (p. 132)

Object representation settings (p. 133)

Defining which objects are disp layed

To define which objects are visible and how they are displayed in a view:1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.

2. Click  Display... to open the Display dialog box.

3. Select or clear check boxes to specify which objects are visible in the view.

See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)

Display settings (p. 216)

Representation options

In rendered views, you can define separately how Tekla Structures displays parts and

component objects. The following options are available:

Page 129: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 129/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 129

Examining the Model

Option Description Example

Wireframe Part outlines are displayed,surfaces are not, i.e. parts aretransparent.

In this example, component objectsare displayed as Rendered.

Shaded

Wireframe

Part outlines are displayed.Parts are transparent, and their

surfaces are shaded.

In this example, component objectsare displayed as Rendered.

Hidden Lines Parts are not transparent, i.e.underlying parts are not visible.

Page 130: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 130/260

 

130 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)

Hiding selected parts

You can quickly hide selected parts in a view. This can be useful, for example, when you wantto temporarily hide parts in order to see the parts behind them.

To hide selected parts:

1. Click  View > Hide Part.

2. Select the parts you want to hide. The parts are shown as sticks.

3. To make the parts visible again, do one of the following:

• Click View > Redraw All.

• Right-click the parts and select Show with Exact Lines.

See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)

Hiding unselected parts (p. 131)

Rendered Part surfaces are displayed, i.e.parts are not transparent.

Show Only

Selected

Selected parts are displayed.Other parts are almostcompletely transparent.

This option is useful, forexample, when viewing clash

check results in a large model.

Use the shortcuts Ctrl+1...5 and Shift+1...5 to set the desiredrepresentation for parts in the model and components.

Option Description Example

To completely hide the parts, hold down the Shift key when selecting thecommand and the parts.

Page 131: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 131/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 131

Examining the Model

Hiding unselected parts

To hide all unselected parts in a view:

1. Select the parts that you want to keep visible.

2. Right-click and select Show Only Selected. The unselected parts become almosttransparent.

3. To make the parts visible again, do one of the following:

• Click View > Redraw All.

• Right-click the parts and select Show with Exact Lines.

See alsoShowing and hiding objects (p. 128)Hiding selected parts (p. 130)

Showing parts wi th exact lines

Use the Show Part with Exact Lines command to temporarily display a part with exact lineseven if you are using the Fast representation option for parts.

To display a part with exact lines:

1. Select the part.

2. Click  View > Representation > Short Part with Exact Lines.

3. Click the view in which you want to display exact lines.

4. To clear the exact lines effect, click View > Redraw All.

See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)

Showing and hiding assemblies

Do any of the following:

To completely hide the unselected parts, hold down the Shift key whenselecting the command.

To show the unselected parts as sticks, hold down the Ctrl key whenselecting the command.

To Do this

Display the contents of an

assembly

• Right-click the assembly and select Assembly >

Show Assembly from the pop-up menu.

Tekla Structures displays all parts, bolts, welds, cuts,fittings, and other details belonging to the assembly,even if you had defined them as hidden in the viewproperties.

Hide an assembly 1. Select the assembly you want to hide.

2. Right-click and select Assembly > Hide from thepop-up menu.

Make a hidden assemblyvisible again

Do one of the following:

• Right-click and select Redraw View.

• Click View > Redraw All.

Page 132: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 132/260

 

132 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)

Refreshing views (p. 39)

Showing and hiding components

Do any of the following:

See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)

Refreshing views (p. 39)

Object groups

Object groups are sets of rules that can be used to group objects based on selected properties

and conditions.Use object groups to control the transparency and coloring of model objects. Object groups arealso used in project status visualizations.

See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)

Creating an object group (p. 132)

Copying an object group to another model (p. 133)

Deleting an object group (p. 133)

Visualizing project status (p. 135)

Creating an object groupTo create an object group:

1. Click  View > Representation > Object Representation... to open the Object

Representation dialog box.

2. Click  Object group... to open the Object Group - Representation dialog box.

3. Modify the object group settings.

a Click  Add row.

b Select options from the Category, Property, and Condition list boxes.

c In the Value list box, type a value or select one from the model.

d Add more rows, and use the And/Or options or parentheses to create morecomplex rules.

4. Select the check boxes next to all object group rules that you want to enable.

The check boxes define which rules are enabled and effective.

To Do this

Display the contents of acomponent

• Click View > Representation > Show Component

Content and select a component.

Tekla Structures displays all bolts, welds, and otherdetails belonging to the component, even if you haddefined them as hidden in the view properties.

Hide a component 1. Select the component you want to hide.

2. Right-click and select Hide from the pop-up menu.

Make a hidden componentvisible again

Do one of the following:

• Right-click and select Redraw View.

• Click View > Redraw All.

Page 133: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 133/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 133

Examining the Model

5. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button.

6. Click  Save as to save the object group.

See also Object groups (p. 132)

Selecting values from the model (p. 238)

Copying an object group to another modelTo copy an object group to another model:

1. Select the object group you want to copy.

The object groups you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, andthey have the file name extension *.PObjGrp.

2. Select where you want to copy the object group.

• To make an object group available in another model, copy the file to the

attributes folder of the destination model.

• To make an object group available in all models, copy the file to the system 

folder.

3. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Object groups (p. 132)

Deleting an object groupTo delete an object group:

1. Delete the object group file located in the model’s attributes folder.

Object groups have the file name extension *.PObjGrp.

2. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Object groups (p. 132)

Object representation settings

Use object representation settings to modify the color and transparency of objects in the modelview, and to create customized presentations of defined objects.

For example, the following images show the same model with different object representationsettings:

Page 134: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 134/260

 

134 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)

Creating object representation settings (p. 134)

Copying object representation settings to another model (p. 135)

Deleting object representation settings (p. 135)

Creating object representation settingsCreate object representation settings to define the color and transparency of objects in a model.

To create object representation settings:

1. Click  View > Representation > Object Representation...

2. Click  Add row.

3. Select a predefined object group from the Object group list box.

4. Use the Color list box to define the color of the objects in the object group.

5. Use the Transparency list box to define the transparency of the objects in the objectgroup.

6. Repeat steps 3–5 for each row you add.

7. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to change the order of the rows.

If an object belongs to several object groups, the coloring and visibility of the objectsdefined on the top row is applied to that object.

8. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button

9. Click  Save as to save the set of object representation settings.

Standard object representation

Only parts whose profile name starts with IPE* or HEA* are visible

Objects whose user-defined attribute Planned erection date is set to01/05/2009

are displayed in blue, while all other parts are 90%transparent

Page 135: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 135/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 135

Examining the Model

See also Object representation settings (p. 133)

Color settings (p. 213)

Transparency settings (p. 214)

Copying object representation settings to another modelTo copy object representation settings to another model:

1. Select the object representation settings you want to copy.

The settings you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, and theyhave the file name extension *.rep.

2. Select where you want to copy the settings.

• To make the settings available in another model, copy them to the attributes 

folder of the destination model.

• To make the settings available in all models, copy them to the system folder.

3. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Object representation settings (p. 133)

Deleting object representation settingsTo delete object representation settings:

1. Delete the object representation file located in the model’s attributes folder.

Object representation settings have the file name extension *.rep.

2. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Object representation settings (p. 133)

5.4 Visualizing project status

Use the Project Status Visualization tool to review the status of modeling objects in a specifictime frame. For example, use this tool to:

• display the erection schedule for groups of parts using different colors• identify the parts that are scheduled to be fabricated during a specific time period.

To create project status visualizations, you need to have predefined object representationsettings that include object groups based on date rules.

See also Creating a visualization (p. 136)

Copying visualization settings to another model (p. 136)

Deleting visualization settings (p. 136)

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project (p. 136)

If your object representation setting does not contain the group All, TeklaStructures adds that row to the bottom of the list when you click Modify,Apply, or OK.

Page 136: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 136/260

 

136 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

Creating a v isualization

To create a project status visualization:

1. Click  Tools > Project Status Visualization... to open the Project Status Visualization dialog box.

2. Modify the visualization settings.

a In the Object representation list box, select one of the predefined objectrepresentation settings.

b Define a start and end date for the time scale slider.

c Define the length of the time step.

3. Select the Refresh view automatically check box.

4. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button.

5. Click  Save as to save the visualization settings.

6. To view the visualization in the model, click the step buttons.

See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project (p. 136)

Copying visualization settings to another model

To copy project status visualization settings to another model:

1. Select the visualization settings you want to copy.

The settings you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, and theyhave the file name extension *.4d.

2. Select where you want to copy the settings.

• To make the settings available in another model, copy them to the attributes 

folder of the destination model.

• To make the settings available in all models, copy them to the system folder.

3. Include a copy of the object representation settings file (*.rep) and object group files(*.PObjGrp) in the attributes and system folders to ensure that all the files willwork correctly.

4. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)

Deleting visualization settings

To delete project status visualization settings:

1. Delete the visualization file located in the model’s attributes folder.

Project status visualization settings have the file name extension *.4d.

2. Restart Tekla Structures.

See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project

This section explains how to visualize erection schedules using the project status visualizationtool available in Tekla Structures.

Page 137: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 137/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 137

Examining the Model

In the following example, you will first define an erection schedule for parts using a specificuser-defined attribute. After that, you will create object groups to define which objects areshown in the model, and object representation settings to define how the objects are shown inthe model. Finally, you will visualize the erection schedule using the project statusvisualization tool.

See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)

Example: Defining an erection schedule (p. 137)

Example: Creating object groups (p. 137)

Creating object representation settings (p. 134)

Example: Creating visualization settings (p. 138)

Example: Visualizing the erection schedule (p. 139)

Example: Defining an erection scheduleIn this example, you will define an erection schedule for parts using the user-defined attributeErection Scheduled.

To define an erection schedule:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.

2. Click  User-defined attributes...

3. On the Status tab, modify the value of the user-defined attribute Erection Scheduled.

4. Ensure that all the check boxes are cleared.

5. Select the Erection Scheduled check box.

6. Select all the parts for which you want to use the same erection date.

7. Click  Modify.

8. Repeat steps 1–7 for each group of parts in your model.

See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)

Example: Creating object groups

In this example, you will create an object group to define which objects are shown in themodel.

To create the object group:

1. Click  View > Representation > Object representation... to open the Object

Representation dialog box.

2. Click  Object group... to open the Object Group - Representation dialog box.

3. Create an object group that includes all objects whose user-defined attribute Erection

Scheduled is earlier than or equal to the review date.

a In the Category list box, select Object.

b In the Property list box, select INSTALL_PLAN.

c In the Condition list box, select Earlier than or equal.

d In the Value list box, select Select date... The Select Date dialog box appears.e Select Review date and click OK.

To make it easier to select parts, create a separate selection filter for eachgroup of parts.

Page 138: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 138/260

 

138 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the group. For example,plan_same_or_before_review_date .

5. Click  Save as.

See also Object groups (p. 132)

Visualizing project status (p. 135)

Example: Creating object representation settingsIn this example, you will create object representation settings to define how the objects areshown in the model.

To create object representation settings:

1. Click  View > Representation > Object Representation... to open the Object

Representation dialog box.

2. Define the color and transparency settings for the object group that you created inExample: Creating object groups (p. 137).

a Click  Add row.

b In the Object group list box, select the object group you just created.

c In the Color list box, select Color by class.

d In the Transparency list box, select Visible.

3. Define the color and transparency settings for the object group All.

a Click  Add row.

b In the Object group list box, select the object group All.

c In the Color list box, select Color by class.

d In the Transparency list box, select Hidden.

4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the object representation settings.For example, scheduled_erection_date .

5. Click  Save as.

See also Object representation settings (p. 133)

Visualizing project status (p. 135)

Example: Creating visualization settingsIn this example, you will create project status visualization settings.

To create visualization settings:

1. Click  Tools > Project Status Visualization... to open the Project Status Visualization dialog box.

2. Define the length of the time step.

3. Define a start and end date for the time scale slider.

4. In the Object representation list box, select the object representation setting youcreated in Example: Creating object representation settings (p. 138).

5. Select the Refresh view automatically check box.

6. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the visualization.

7. Click  Save as to save the visualization settings.

Page 139: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 139/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 139

Examining the Model

See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)

Example: Visualizing the erection scheduleIn this example, you will visualize the erection schedule using the Project Status

Visualization tool.

To visualize the erection schedule:

1. Click  Tools > Project Status Visualization... to open the Project Status Visualization dialog box.

2. In the list box next to the Load button, select the visualization setting you created inExample: Creating visualization settings (p. 138).

3. Click  Load.

4. To view the visualization in the model, click the step buttons.

The images below show how the objects are shown when you change the review date:

Page 140: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 140/260

 

140 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

Review date Visualization

November 02

November 05

November 08

Page 141: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 141/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 141

Examining the Model

November 11

November 14

Review date Visualization

Page 142: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 142/260

 

142 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)

5.5 Checking the model

When the model is complete, it is useful to check the model for errors.

See also Measuring objects (p. 143)

Detecting clashes (p. 144)

Comparing parts or assemblies (p. 149)

Finding distant objects (p. 149)

November 17

November 20

Review date Visualization

Page 143: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 143/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 143

Examining the Model

Measuring objects

Use the Measure tool to measure angles, the distance between two points and between bolts.

All measurements are temporary. The measurements appear in the rendered view window untilyou update or redraw the window.

See also Measuring distances (p. 143)

Measuring angles (p. 143)

Measuring bolt spacing (p. 143)

Measuring distancesTo measure horizontal, vertical and user-defined distances:

1. Press Ctrl+P to switch to the plane view.

2. Click  Tools > Measure and select a command that measures distances.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

3. Pick the starting point.

4. Pick the end point.5. Pick a point to indicate on which side of the dimension line you want the number to

appear.

See also Measuring objects (p. 143)

Measuring anglesTo measure angles:

1. Click or Tools > Measure > Angle.

2. Pick the center point.

3. Pick the starting point.4. Pick the end point.

See also Measuring objects (p. 143)

Measuring bolt spacingYou can measure distances between bolts in a bolt group. Tekla Structures also gives you theedge distances between the bolts and a selected part.

To measure bolt spacing:

1. Click or Tools > Measure > Bolt Spacing.

2. Select a bolt group.3. Select a part.

Page 144: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 144/260

 

144 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

See also Measuring objects (p. 143)

Detecting clashes

Use the Clash Check tool to find parts, bolts, or reference model objects that collide. Clashesof objects that only touch one another are not included in the clash check results.

The following reference model file types are supported in clash checking:

• IFC

• DWG

• DGN

See also Finding clashes in a model (p. 145)

Clash Check Manager (p. 145)

Defining a clash check clearance area for bolts (p. 148)

Reverting to the old clash checking functionality (p. 149)

If you want to use another Tekla Structures model as a reference model,you must export it in IFC format to be able to use it in clash checking.

If you are checking a reference model for clashes, ensure that all theparts of the reference model are selected.

Page 145: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 145/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 145

Examining the Model

Finding clashes in a modelTo find clashes in a model:

1. Select the objects you want to check.

2. Click  Tools > Clash Check.

The clash check progress is displayed on the status bar. You can continue working

during the clash check.If colliding objects are found, Tekla Structures highlights them in yellow and displaysthe clash check log.

3. To locate the colliding objects, select a row in the clash check log.

Tekla Structures selects the corresponding objects in the model.

See also Useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports (p. 241)

Clash Check Manager If you are using the Full or Construction Management configuration, you can also use Clash

Check Manager to detect and manage clashes in a model.

See also Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager (p. 146)

Managing the list of clashes (p. 146)

Symbols used in clash checking (p. 146)

Changing the status of clashes (p. 147)

Changing the priority of clashes (p. 147)

If you start clash checking while another clash check is still running, youcan choose whether to continue checking, restart the operation and check the currently selected parts, or stop checking.

Page 146: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 146/260

 

146 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

Opening and saving clash check sessions (p. 147)

Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager 

To find clashes in a model:

1. Click  Tools > Clash Check Manager.

2. In the model, select the objects you want to include in the clash check.

3. Click to check the objects.

You can continue working during the clash check. When the clash check is complete, thestatus bar message changes from Clash checking in progress to Ready.

When you re-run clash check, new clashes are appended to the end of the list.

4. To highlight a clash in the model, select a row in the list of clashes.

The clash is highlighted in the model and the related model objects are selected.

5. To zoom the active view so that the selected objects are shown in the center of the view,double-click a row.

See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)

Managing the list of clashes

To manage the list of clashes in Clash Check Manager:

See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)

Symbols used in clash checking

Clash Check Manager uses the following flags to indicate the state of clashes:

To Do this

Change the sort order of clashresults

Click the heading of the desired column to alternatebetween the ascending and descending sort order.

Select multiple rows in the list of clashes

Hold down Ctrl or Shift while selecting rows.

Show or hide a column 1. Right-click one of the colum headings to open apop-up menu.

2. Click any of the list items to show or hide them.

A check mark in front of the item indicates that

it is visible.

Flag State Description

(none) Active The default state. The clash is not new, modified,resolved, or missing.

New All clashes are marked as new when they arefound for the first time.

Modified If the object has been modified (for example, if theprofile has changed), the state changes to modifiedwhen you re-run clash check.

Only certain object properties affect this flag. Tosee which properties have an effect, right-click oneof the column headings. Both visible and hidden

properties affect the flag.

Page 147: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 147/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 147

Examining the Model

See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)

Changing the status of clashes

To change the status of clashes:

1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes whose status you want to change.

2. Right-click one of the selected rows to open a pop-up menu.

3. Select Status and then one of the status options:

• Assign

• Fix

• Approve

• Ignore

• Reopen

See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)

Changing the priority of clashes

To change the priority of clashes:

1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes whose priority you want to change.

2. Right-click one of the selected rows to open a pop-up menu.

3. Select Priority and then one of the status options:

• High

• Medium

• Low

See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)

Opening and saving clash check sessions

To open or save sessions in Clash Check Manager, do any of the following:

Resolved If the objects no longer clash, the state changes toresolved when you re-run clash check.

Missing If one or both of the clashing objects have beenremoved from the model, the state changes to

missing when you re-run clash check.

Flag State Description

To Do this

Open a session1. Click .

2. In the Open dialog box, select a session.

3. Click  OK.

Create a new sessionClick .

Clash Check Manager clears the list of clasheswithout running clash check.

Page 148: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 148/260

 

148 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)

Defin ing a clash check c learance area for bol tsTo check if bolts collide with profiles and if there is enough space to fix the bolt, you can definea clash check clearance area for bolts.

To define a clearance area for bolts:

1. Click  Tools > Options > Options...

2. In the Options dialog box, go to the Clash check page.

3. Modify the bolt clearance values.

If the fields are empty, Tekla Structures uses the default value 1.00.

4. Ensure that you have selected the check box in front of each field.

If you clear the check boxes, the clearance will be zero.

5. Click  Apply or OK.

Save the active sessionClick .

Save the active session under adifferent name or in a different

location

1. Click the arrow button next to the icon.

A pop-up menu appears.

2. Click   Save as.

3. In the Save As dialog box, browse to the folderwhere you want to save the session.

4. In the File name box, enter a new name.

5. Click  Save.

By default, clash check sessions are stored as XML files in the..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\Clashes folder.Tekla Structures creates the folder automatically when you open Clash

Check Manager for the first time.

To Do this

d is the larger value of the bolt head or nut diameters

Clash check clearance area

Page 149: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 149/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 149

Examining the Model

See also Detecting clashes (p. 144)

Reverting to the old clash checking functionalityIf you are working on a large model, running the clash check may sometimes be slow. In thatcase you can use the old clash checking functionality, which does not recognize clashes withreference models.

For more information on the old clash checking functionality, seeXS_USE_NEW_CLASH_CHECK andXS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES.

See also Detecting clashes (p. 144)

Comparing parts or assemblies

To compare two parts or assemblies:

1. Select the objects you want to compare.

• To compare parts, select two parts in the model.

• To compare assemblies, select a part in each assembly.

2. Click  Tools > Compare, and then select either Parts or Assemblies.

Tekla Structures displays the results on the status bar.

See also Checking the model (p. 142)

Finding distant objects

When the work area is huge, the model may contain some distant objects that are not easy tofind. Use the Find Distant Objects command to find these objects.

To find distant objects:

1. Click  Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Find Distant Objects.

Tekla Structures displays a list of object IDs.

2. Select an object in the list.

3. Right-click and select a command from the pop-up menu.

You can, for example, inquire or delete the object.

See also XS_DISTANT_OBJECT_FINDER_TOLERANCE

Checking the model (p. 142)

If Tekla Structures cannot find the bolt head or nut diameter in the boltcatalog, it uses the shank diameter instead.

You cannot use this command to find parts (such as beams, columns orplates).

Page 150: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 150/260

 

150 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Examining the Model

Page 151: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 151/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 151

Numbering the Model

6 Numbering the Model

This section explains how to change numbering settings and apply numbering in TeklaStructures.

Contents • What is numbering (p. 151)

• What affects numbering (p. 152)

• Numbering objects (p. 156)

• Defining numbering series (p. 153)

• Viewing the numbering history (p. 161)

6.1 What is numbering

Tekla Structures assigns a mark to each part and assembly in a model. The mark includes partor assembly prefix and position number, and other elements (such as profile or material grade).This process is called numbering . Part numbers are vital in the fabrication, shipping, anderection stages of construction.

Tekla Structures also uses numbers to identify parts, cast units, and assemblies when producingdrawings and reports, and exporting models. You must have Tekla Structures number the modelbefore you can create single-part, assembly, cast unit, and multi-drawings, or export files froma model.

Tekla Structures uses part numbers in many tasks, for example to:

• connect a drawing with the right part, cast unit, or assembly

• report the properties of identical parts, cast units, and assemblies

• identify part information when exporting parts to another software.

If the numbering of a part or assembly is not up to date, a question mark (?) is displayed in thepart label and in the Inquire Object dialog box. For example:

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Page 152: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 152/260

 

152 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Numbering the Model

What affects numbering (p. 152)

Inquiring object properties (p. 126)

6.2 What affects numberingTekla Structures treats objects as different, and therefore numbers them differently, if thefollowing properties differ:

• Beam orientation

• Column orientation

• Reinforcement

• Cast-in embeds

• Surface treatment (affects only assemblies)

• Pop marks

• Shortening• User-defined attributes

To define which properties affect numbering in your model, modify the settings in theNumbering Setup dialog box. For example, if two otherwise identical concrete parts havedifferent names and you select the Part name check box, Tekla Structures gives the partsdifferent numbers.

By default, a part retains its number, as long as only one part has that particular number,regardless of the settings in the Numbering Setup dialog box.

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Numbering settings (p. 233)

Identical parts (p. 152)

Identical reinforcements (p. 153)

User-defined attributes in numbering (p. 153)

Identical parts

Tekla Structures gives parts the same number if the parts are identical in the fabrication orcasting. If a part is deformed after fabrication or casting (for example if the part is cambered,shortened, or warped), the final geometry on site and in the model may be different.

Tekla Structures treats parts as identical and gives them the same number if the following basicpart properties are the same:

• Part geometry

• Numbering series

• Profile

• Material

• Finish

Always carry out full numbering on the model after you have changedthe numbering settings.

If the Renumber all option is selected in the Numbering Setup dialogbox, Tekla Structures will always carry out full renumbering.

Page 153: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 153/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 153

Numbering the Model

You can set the degree of tolerance for part geometry in the Numbering Setup dialog box. If the geometry of parts differs within this degree of tolerance, Tekla Structures treats the parts asidentical for numbering purposes.

Class and phase do not affect numbering. Tekla Structures gives the same number to identicalparts that belong to different classes or phases.

See also What affects numbering (p. 152)Parts (p. 51)

Phases (p. 171)

Identical reinforcements

Tekla Structures treats reinforcing bars as identical, and gives them the same number, if thefollowing properties are the same:

• Bar geometry

• Numbering series

• Size• Grade

• Bending radius

Tekla Structures uses the values of the rebar_config.inp file located in the ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system\ folder toround bar dimensions up or down. For example, if you set the rounding accuracy for bardimensions to 5 and the rounding direction to up, Tekla Structures rounds all bar dimensions upto the nearest 5 mm. In that case, two bars with dimensions of 131 mm and 133 mm would bothround up to 135 mm. This gives them identical bar geometry.

Class does not affect numbering. Tekla Structures gives the same number to identicalreinforcing bars that belong to different classes.

See also What affects numbering (p. 152)

Reinforcement

User-defined attributes in numbering

Tekla Structures treats parts and reinforcing bars as different, and therefore numbers themdifferently, if the values of a user-defined attribute differ.

Parts If a user-defined attribute has the variable special_flag set to yes, Tekla Structures takesthis user-defined attribute into account when numbering parts.

Reinforcements If a user-defined attribute has the variable consider_in_numbering set to yes, Tekla

Structures takes this user-defined attribute into account when numbering reinforcements.

See also What affects numbering (p. 152)

User-defined attributes (p. 55)

6.3 Defining numbering series

You can use a numbering series to divide steel parts, cast units, and assemblies into groups. Forexample, you can allocate a separate numbering series to different phases or part types.

Page 154: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 154/260

 

154 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Numbering the Model

The name of a numbering series consists of a prefix and a start number . You do not have todefine a part prefix (for example, you may want to omit the part prefix for minor parts).

When you run numbering, Tekla Structures compares parts that belong to the same series witheach other. All identical parts in the same numbering series are given the same part number.

Example For example, if you define a numbering series with the prefix P and start number 1001, TeklaStructures numbers that series P1001, P1002, P1003, ...

See also Planning your numbering series (p. 154)

Assigning a numbering series to a part (p. 154)

Family numbers (p. 155)

Overlapping numbering series (p. 156)

Planning your numbering series

Before you start modeling, it is good idea to plan the numbering prefixes and start numbers youwill use for the entire project. Careful planning prevents numbering conflicts.

To save time, include the numbering series in the default part properties for each type of partbefore you start modeling.

You may want to omit the part prefix for minor parts, such as plates. If you do this, ensure thatyou assign a Start number for that numbering series so that it will not overlap other parts.

Example One way to plan the numbering series is to create a table:

See also Defining numbering series (p. 153)

Overlapping numbering series (p. 156)

 Assigning a numbering series to a part

You can assign a numbering series to any part or assembly.

To assign a numbering series to a part:

Concrete parts are numbered according to the cast unit numberingsettings. For example, if the cast unit prefix is C and the start number is1, concrete parts will get the part prefix Concrete_C-1.

This applies also to concrete components whose part position prefix isConcrete and start number is 1.

Part type

Part

Prefix

Part

Startnumber

Assembly

Prefix

Assembly

Start number

Beam PB 1 AB 1

Vertical brace PVB 1 AVB 1

Horizontal brace PHB 1 AHB 1

Rafter PR 1 AR 1

Purlin PP 1 AP 1

Column PC 1 AC 1

Plate 1001 A 1

Page 155: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 155/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 155

Numbering the Model

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.

2. If you are modifying the properties of a concrete part, go to the Cast unit tab.

3. Under Numbering series, define a part prefix and a start number.

4. Click  Modify.

See also Defining numbering series (p. 153)

Family numbers

With family numbering you can group objects within the same numbering series into different“families”. This can be used, for example, to find similar cast units that can be cast in the samebed.

When you use family numbering, the cast unit position numbers consist of a family number  and a qualifier . For example:

Assemblies and cast units that match the comparison criteria you define in the Numbering

Setup dialog box get the same family number. However, if they have the same family numberbut different part geometry or materials, they get unique qualifier numbers.

See also Defining numbering series (p. 153)

Assigning family numbers (p. 155)

Changing the family number of an object (p. 156)

Example: Using family numbers (p. 163)

 Assigning family numbersTo assign family numbers to numbering series:

1. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open theNumbering Setup dialog box.

2. Go to the Family numbering tab.

3. Define which numbering series to assign family numbers to.

a Click  Add series to open the Add series dialog box.

Tekla Structures displays all the assembly and cast unit numbering series in themodel.

b Select a numbering series from the list, and then click Add.

The numbering series appears in the family numbering list.

4. Under Compare, select the properties that need to be identical for the members of thesame family.

Define comparison criteria for each numbering series separately.

Family number

Qualifier

Page 156: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 156/260

 

156 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Numbering the Model

Select at least one check box, but not all of them. If you select all the check boxes, thefamily number will be the same as the normal assembly position, and the qualifiernumber will be 1 for all. If you do not select any check boxes, only one family numberper series is assigned.

5. Click  Apply.

Tekla Structures stores the settings in the numbering database file

(<model_name>.db2) in the current model folder the next time you save the model.

6. If you are assigning family numbers to parts that have already been numbered, clear theexisting numbers.

7. Update numbering in the model.

Tekla Structures assigns a family number to all objects in the numbering series.

See also Family numbers (p. 155)

Clearing numbers (p. 160)

Changing the family number of an objectTo change the family number and/or family qualifier of an object:

1. Select the objects whose family numbers you want to change.2. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Change Number > Family Number...

3. In the Assign Family Number dialog box, type the desired values in the Family number and Family qualifier fields.

4. Click  Assign.

See also Family numbers (p. 155)

Overlapping numbering series

When you plan numbering, ensure that you reserve enough numbers for each series. If a seriesoverlaps another, Tekla Structures might allocate the same number to different parts.

Tekla Structures warns you about series overlaps. View the numbering history log to check which numbers overlap.

See also Defining numbering series (p. 153)

Viewing the numbering history (p. 161)

6.4 Numbering objects

To number objects in a model:1. Optional: Modify the numbering settings.

a Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open theNumbering Setup dialog box.

b Modify the settings.

c Click  Apply or OK.

2. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering and select one of the following commands:

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

Page 157: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 157/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 157

Numbering the Model

See also Numbering settings (p. 233)

Numbering assemblies and cast units (p. 157)

Numbering reinforcements (p. 157)

Saving preliminary numbers (p. 158)

Control numbers (p. 158)

Changing numbers (p. 159)

Clearing numbers (p. 160)

Creating a standard-part model (p. 160)

Example: Numbering identical beams (p. 162)

Numbering assemblies and cast units

Part numbering does not affect cast unit and assembly numbering. However, Tekla Structuresnumbers assemblies and cast units in the same way as it does parts. The default start number is1. The prefix varies based on the part type.

Surface treatments affect the numbering of assemblies, if you select the Surface treatment check box in the Numbering Setup dialog box.

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Assembly position numbers (p. 157)

 Assembly posi tion numbersUse the options in the Numbering Setup dialog box to sort the order in which assemblies aregiven their position numbers. Sorting by user-defined attributes or by location does not affectthe part position.

The sort order can be based on the following criteria:

• The x, y or z coordinates of the main part of the assembly

The sorting is based on the center of gravity of the reference axis.

• The user-defined attribute of an assembly or the main part

If your sorting is based on user-defined attributes, Tekla Structures displays a list box thatincludes all the available user-defined attributes.

See also Numbering assemblies and cast units (p. 157)

Numbering reinforcements

Part numbering and cast unit numbering do not affect the numbering of reinforcements.However, Tekla Structures numbers reinforcements in the same way as it does parts.

Assembly and cast unit numbering may affect part numbering, if theadvanced option XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR is set.

If you add new parts, objects that have already been numbered are not renumbered to suit the sorting order by, for example, the x coordinate. Inthis case you should renumber the parts.

Page 158: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 158/260

 

158 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Numbering the Model

To force Tekla Structures to give otherwise identical concrete parts and cast units differentnumbers if they have different reinforcements, select the Reinforcing bars check box in theNumbering Setup dialog box.

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Saving preliminary numbers

A preliminary mark is a user-defined attribute that defines the part position number. You cansave the current part position numbers as preliminary marks for selected parts. The previouspreliminary numbers are overriden.

To save part position numbers for preliminary marks:

1. Select the parts.

2. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Save Preliminary Numbers.

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Control numbersControl numbers are properties that identify the location of parts in a model. You can assignconsecutive control numbers to all the parts or only selected parts.

When you assign control numbers, you can specify in what order to assign control numbers,according to the location of each part on the global coordinate system. The options are:

• None

• X

• -X

• Z

•-Z

• Y

• -Y

With positive directions (such as X), the parts with the lowest coordinate value are numberedfirst. With negative directions (such as -X), the parts with the highest coordinate value arenumbered first.

For example, if First direction is -X, Second direction is Y, and Third direction is Z,numbering starts from the parts that have the highest x coordinate value. If multiple parts havethe same x coordinate, their y coordinates are also compared. If multiple parts have the same xand y coordinates, their z coordinates are also compared.

Example In the following example, the sort order is X Y Z.

Page 159: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 159/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 159

Numbering the Model

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Assigning control numbers to parts (p. 159)

Locking and unlocking control numbers (p. 159)

 Assigning control numbers to parts

Before you start, number the model.

To assign control numbers to parts:

1. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Assign Control Numbers... to open theCreate control numbers dialog box.

2. Indicate which parts to consider.

• To consider all parts in the model, do not select any parts.

• To only consider specific parts, select the parts.

3. In the Numbering list box, specify which parts get control numbers.

4. If you are assigning control numbers to parts in a specific numbering series, type theprefix and start number in the corresponding fields.

5. Define the control numbers to be used.

a In the Start number of control numbers field, type the first control number to beused.

b In the Step value field, define the interval.

For example, to assign the control numbers 2, 5, 8, 11, etc., type 2 in the Start

number of control numbers field and 3 in the Step value field.

6. In the Renumber list box, specify how to treat parts that already have control numbers.

7. Use the direction list boxes to specify in what order to assign control numbers.

8. Click  Apply, and then click Create.

See also Control numbers (p. 158)

Control number settings (p. 235)

Locking and unlocking control numbersTo prevent Tekla Structures from renumbering the control numbers of all parts, or specificparts, use the Lock/Unlock Control Numbers command.

To lock or unlock control numbers:

1. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Lock/Unlock Control Numbers to open theLock/Unlock control numbers (S10) dialog box.

2. Define which parts’ control numbers to lock or unlock.

• To lock or unlock the control numbers of all parts, do not select any parts in the

model.

• To lock or unlock the control numbers of specific parts, select the parts in the

model.

3. In the Status list box, select Lock or Unlock in the Status.

4. Click  Apply, and then click Create.

See also Control numbers (p. 158)

Changing numbers

Use the Change Number command to change part, assembly, multi-position, or familynumbers after you run numbering. All objects with the same number will be given the numberyou specified. This command does not change the numbering series.

To change the position numbers:

Page 160: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 160/260

 

160 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Numbering the Model

1. Select an object.

2. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Change Number and select one of thecommands.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

3. Set the desired properties. The options you have vary depending on your selection instep 2.

If the number you specified is already in use, Tekla Structures displays a warning anddoes not change the number.Tekla Structures also displays a warning if the positionnumber is higher than the highest current number. This is for information only and thenumber is still changed.

4. Click  Assign.

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Clearing numbers

Use the Clear Numbers command to permanently delete the assigned position numbers of objects. Next time you run numbering, Tekla Structures assigns new numbers to the objects,irrespective of what their previous numbers were.

To clear the position numbers:

1. Select the objects whose numbers you want to clear.

2. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Clear Numbers and select one of thecommands.

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Creating a standard-part modelA standard-part model contains only standard parts with specific part prefixes. You can haveTekla Structures use these prefixes when numbering parts in another model.

To create a standard-part model:

1. Create a new model and give it a descriptive name.

This functionality only applies to steel parts.

Page 161: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 161/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 161

Numbering the Model

For example, StandardParts.

2. Create the objects you want to have as standard parts.

3. Explode all components.

4. Delete all unnecessary items.

5. Give the objects prefixes that are not used elsewhere (for example, STD1, STD2, and soon).

Ensure that the standard-part model does not contain duplicate prefixes.

6. Save the standard-part model.

7. Open another model.

8. Click  Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Numbering.

9. Check that the advanced option XS_STD_PART_MODEL is set, and that it points tothe correct standard-part model.

For example:

XS_STD_PART_MODEL=C:\Tekla StructuresModels\StandardParts

10. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to display theNumbering Setup dialog box.

11. If you have selected the Part name check box, ensure that the project model has the

same part names as the standard-part model.

12. Click  Check for standard parts and Apply.

13. Number the model.

As Tekla Structures carries out the numbering, it compares all of the parts in the modelto the standard-part model. The numbering applies any part position numbers (only thepart prefix) found in the standard-part model to all identical parts found in the projectmodel.

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

6.5 Viewing the numbering historyTo view the numbering history:

• Click Tools > Display Log File > Numbering History....

Tekla Structures displays the numbering log file.

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

6.6 Repairing numbering errors

We recommend that you check and repair numbering in the model every now and then,especially before producing drawings or reports.

To check and repair numbering in a model:

1. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open theNumbering Setup dialog box.

For information on how to interpret the log file, see Numbering historylog.

Page 162: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 162/260

 

162 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Numbering the Model

2. Ensure that one of the following options is being used:

• Compare to old

• Keep number if possible

3. Click  OK to save the changes.

4. Unless you want to repair the entire model, select the objects whose numbering you

want to repair.5. Click  Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model and select one of the following commands:

• Diagnose & Repair Numbering: All

• Diagnose & Repair Numbering: Series of Selected Objects

For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Changing numbers (p. 159)

6.7 Numbering examples

This section gives some examples of numbering the model.

Contents Example: Numbering identical beams (p. 162)

Example: Using family numbers (p. 163)

Example: Numbering selected part types (p. 164)

Example: Numbering parts in selected phases (p. 164)

Example: Numbering settings during a project (p. 165)

Example: Numbering identical beams

This example explains how different numbering settings result in different part numbers whenyou modify a part.

To number identical beams:

1. Create three identical beams with the numbering series prefix P and start number 1.

2. Number the model. All the beams have the part position number P1.

3. Modify one of the beams.

4. Number the model. You should now have two beams P1 and one P2.

5. Change beam P2 to be identical to the others.

6. Number the model.

Tekla Structures assigns the position number of the oldest part orassembly to all identical parts, even if a newer part or assembly has asmaller position number.

To force a certain position number on a part or assembly, use the Change

Number command after repairing numbering in the model.

Page 163: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 163/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 163

Numbering the Model

Depending on the numbering settings in the Numbering Setup dialog box, TeklaStructures assigns one of the following part position numbers to the modified part:

• Compare to old: P1

• Keep number if possible: P2

• Take new number: P3

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Example: Using family numbers

In this example, the following four beams have the numbering series prefix B and the startnumber 1. The parts have the same main profile, and each pair has the same length, but theholes are different.

We use the following family numbering settings:

• Numbering series: B/1

• Compare: Main part profile and Overall length

With the given family numbering criteria, Tekla Structures divides the beams into two families.All beams have the same profile, but each pair has a different length. Within both families thebeams get different qualifiers because they have different holes.

• The first beam gets the assembly position number B/1-1

• The second beam gets the assembly position number B/1-2

• The third beam gets the assembly position number B/2-1

• The fourth beam gets the assembly position number B/2-2

See also Family numbers (p. 155)

Assembly position: B/1

Assembly position: B/2

Assembly position: B/3

Assembly position: B/4

Page 164: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 164/260

 

164 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Numbering the Model

Example: Numbering selected part types

This example shows how different numbering settings can be used for different part types. Wewill use one set of numbering settings for steel anchor rods, and another one for steel columns.

To number anchor rods and columns:

1. Create steel columns.2. Create anchor rods with the numbering series prefix AR and start number 1.

Ensure that this numbering series is different to any other parts or assemblies in themodel.

3. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open theNumbering Setup dialog box.

4. Ensure that the Column orientation check box is not selected, and then click Apply.

5. Select one of the anchor rods in the model.

6. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects.

All parts with the AR prefix and start number at 1 are numbered.

7. After the anchor rod numbering is complete, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering >

Number Series of Selected Objects.

8. Select the Column orientation check box, and then click Apply.

9. Select one of the steel columns in the model.

10. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects.

All columns belonging to the same numbering series as the selected column arenumbered.

Example: Numbering parts in selected phases

This example shows how to number a model that consists of multiple phases, each phasehaving a different detailing and submittal schedule. This enables you to release drawings for aparticular phase at any time.

Before you start, divide the model into phases.

To number parts in selected phases:

1. Apply a specific numbering series prefix and start number for parts in each phase.

For example:

Page 165: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 165/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 165

Numbering the Model

• The beams in phase 1 get the numbering series prefix B and start number 1000.

• The beams in phase 2 get the numbering series prefix B and start number 2000.

2. Ensure that the numbering series are not overlapping.

For example, to avoid numbering overlaps with the beams in phase 2, phase 1 should notcontain more than 1000 position numbers.

3. Select the parts you want to number.

4. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open theNumbering Setup dialog box.

5. Modify the numbering settings, and then click Apply.

6. Select one of the parts you want to number.

7. Click  Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects.

All parts belonging to the same numbering series as the selected part are numbered.

See also Example: Numbering settings during a project (p. 165)

Example: Numbering settings during a project

You can use different numbering settings at different times in a project. For example:

Phase 1: green

Phase 2: magenta

Use selection filters to easily select parts belonging to a certain phase orparts with a specific start number series. You can also use selectionfilters to ignore specific phases that are already completed or phases thatare not ready for numbering.

Page 166: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 166/260

 

166 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Numbering the Model

• Before releasing a phase of the project for fabrication, you might use the Re-use old

numbers option for numbering the entire model.

• If a phase has already been released for fabrication in a project, you might use the Take

new number option for new and modified parts.

• If you are numbering other phases of the project at earlier stages of detailing, you might

use the Compare to old option and try to combine as many position numbers as possible.

See also Example: Numbering parts in selected phases (p. 164)

General numbering settings (p. 233)

Page 167: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 167/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 167

Advanced Modeling

7 Advanced Modeling

This section explains some advanced modeling techniques available in Tekla Structures.

Contents • Organizing the model (p. 167)

• Phases (p. 171)

• Sequences (p. 172)

• Lotting (p. 174)

• Parametric modeling (p. 176)

• Sketched cross sections (p. 181)

7.1 Organizing the model

Use the Model Organizer to manage and view different logical areas and object types in yourmodel. You can classify information according to your needs.

Model Organizer can be used in construction planning and management. You can divide alarge model into logical sections and floors to help create building schedules, lots, and erectionsequences, and categorize object types, for example, based on purchasing contracts. You cancategorize both native Tekla Structures objects and reference objects.

Page 168: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 168/260

 

168 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

See also Creating logical areas (p. 168)

Creating object type categories (p. 169)

Modifying logical areas and object type categories (p. 169)

Viewing logical areas and object type categories (p. 170)

Deleting logical areas and object type categories (p. 171)

Creating logical areas

Logical areas may already have been defined for the model. You can create new logical areas

for your own needs.

Model Organizer is included in the Full and Construction Managementconfigurations only.

Page 169: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 169/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 169

Advanced Modeling

To create logical areas using Model Organizer:

1. Click  Tools > Model Organizer....

2. Create a path structure.

a Right-click  Logical Areas.

b Click  New Building.

c Click  New Section.

d Click  New Story.

You may create as many sections and storys as you need. Note that sections andstorys are both created under buildings.

3. Select a section or story in Model Organizer.

4. In the model, select the area for the section or the story.

Each model object can belong to only one section and one story.

5. In Model Organizer, right-click the selected section or story, and select Add Selected to

Category.

See also Organizing the model (p. 167)

Creating object type categories

Object types may already have been defined for the model. You can create new object typecategories for your own needs.

To create object type categories using Model Organizer:

1. Click  Tools > Model Organizer....

2. Create object type categories.

a Right-click  Object Types.

b Click  New Object Type.

You can also create subtypes for object types.

3. In the model, select the objects you want to add to an object type category.

4. In Model Organizer, right-click the object type category and select Add Selected to

Category .

See also Organizing the model (p. 167)

Modifying logical areas and object type categories

To modify logical areas or object type categories, do any of the following:

In large projects, you can create sites for your project by right-clicking

Logical Areas and selecting Show Site(s). You can hide the sites byselecting Hide Site(s).

To make it easier to view and select parts, create a separate view orselection filter for each group of parts.

Page 170: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 170/260

 

170 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

See also Organizing the model (p. 167)

Viewing logical areas and object type categories

To view logical areas and object type categories in the model, do any of the following:

See also Organizing the model (p. 167)

To Do this

Rename logical areas andobject type categories

Right-click the name in Model Organizer and selectRename.

Redefine a logical area 1. Select the new area in the model.

2. Right-click the area name in Model Organizer andselect Add Selected to Category.

Move categories 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.

2. Drag the category to another location.

Add objects 1. Select the objects in the model.

2. Right-click the category name in Model Organizer and select Add Selected to Category.

Move objects 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.

2. Hold down the Ctrl key and select the objects youwant to move.

3. Drag the objects to another category.

Remove objects 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.

2. Hold down the Ctrl key and select the objects youwant to remove.

3. Right-click and select Remove from Category.

To Do this

View a logical area or objectsbelonging to an object typecategory

Select the logical area or the object type category.

The logical area or objects belonging to the selectedobject type category are highlighted in the model.

View more than one logicalarea or object type category ata time

Hold down the Ctrl key and select the logical areas andobject type categories you want to view.

View only the objectsbelonging the selectedcategory

Right-click a logical area or an object type category andselect Show Only Selected.

To show all objects again, right-click the category and

select Redraw View.

Hide the objects belonging tothe selected category

Right-click a logical area or an object type category andselect Hide.

To show all objects again, right-click the category andselect Redraw View.

View the classificationinformation of an object

Right-click the object in the model and select Model

Classification > Show Related Classification

or

in Model Organizer select an object and click .

Page 171: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 171/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 171

Advanced Modeling

Deleting logical areas and object type categories

To delete a logical area or an object type category using Model Organizer:

1. Click  Tools > Model Organizer....

2. Select a category under Logical Areas or Object Types.

3. Right-click and select Delete.4. Click  OK to confirm.

See also Organizing the model (p. 167)

7.2 Phases

Use phases to break up a model into sections. Phases are often used to indicate erectionsequences. You can create reports and views, hide objects, and copy objects from other models,according to their phase number.

For example, you might have a large project which several users work on simultaneously insingle-user mode. First create a basic model that includes, for example, the columns. This isphase 1. You then copy this basic model to all users.

Each user then works on a separate part of the building. When a part of the model is completed,you can copy it back to the basic model as a separate phase (phase 2, 3, etc.).

See also Dividing the model into phases (p. 171)

Custom phase properties (p. 171)

Dividing the model into phases

To divide a model into phases:

1. Click  Tools > Phase Manager.... The Phase Manager dialog box appears.

2. Click  Add to create new phases.

3. Click  Set current to make the selected phase the current phase.

From now on, Tekla Structures assigns all objects you create to the current phase. The @character in front of the phase number indicates the current phase.

4. Divide the model into phases.

a To identify the phase of an object, select an object and click Phases by objects.

Tekla Structures selects the phase of the object.

b To see which objects belong to a certain phase, select a phase from the list andthen click Objects by phases.

Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding objects in the model.

c To change the phase of one or more objects, select the objects, select a phase fromthe list, and then click Modify phase.

5. Click  OK to save your changes.

See also Phases (p. 171)

Custom phase properties

You can add custom phase properties, which will appear as extra columns in the Phase

Manager dialog box.

Page 172: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 172/260

 

172 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

Define the names of phase properties in the objects.inp file. To use phase properties inreports and templates, use the syntax PHASE.ATTRIBUTE_NAME in the phase property fieldname.

See also Phases (p. 171)

7.3 Sequences

Use the Sequencer tool to name sequences and assign incremental numbers to parts. Forexample, you can define the order in which to erect parts by creating erection sequences. Youcan define several sequences for different purposes, and a part can belong to several sequencesat the same time.

Sequencer works by assigning a sequence number to a user-defined attribute of a part. Thesequence name that you enter in the Sequencer Properties dialog box is the name of the user-defined attribute defined in the objects.inp file.

Limitations Sequencer does not work for objects that are inside a reference model.

See also Creating a sequence (p. 172)

Adding parts to a sequence (p. 173)

Checking the sequence of a part (p. 173)

Modifying the sequence number of a part (p. 173)

Deleting a sequence (p. 173)

Creating a sequence

Use the Sequencer tool to assign sequence numbers to parts. If you want to view and modifythe sequence number afterwards, you must first create a user-defined attribute to which youassign sequence numbers.

To create a new sequence:

1. Create a user-defined attribute to which you assign sequence numbers.

a Open the objects.inp file in any standard text editor.

b In the Part attributes section, add a new user-defined attribute.

The value_type must be integer, and the field_format must be %d.

For example:

attribute("MY_INFO_1", "My Info 1", integer, "%d", no, none,

"0.0", "0.0")

c Save the file.d Restart Tekla Structures.

2. Click  Tools > Sequencer to display the Sequencer Properties dialog box.

3. Type a name for the sequence. Use exactly the same name as in the objects.inp file.

For example, MY_INFO_1.

4. Click  Apply.

5. Select the parts you want to include in the sequence.

The first part gets the sequence number 1, the second part number 2, and so on.

If you select a part that has already been included in the sequence, Tekla Structures asksif you want to override the existing number. If you click Yes, Tekla Structures gives thenext available number to the part.

6. To finish adding parts to the sequence, click Edit > Interrupt or press Esc.

Page 173: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 173/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 173

Advanced Modeling

See also Sequences (p. 172)

 Adding parts to a sequence

To add parts to an existing sequence:

1. Click  Tools > Sequencer to display the Sequencer Properties dialog box.2. Select a sequence name from the list.

3. Click  OK or Apply.

4. Select the parts you want to add to the sequence.

5. To finish adding parts to the sequence, click Edit > Interrupt or press Esc.

See also Sequences (p. 172)

Checking the sequence of a part

You can check the sequence name and number of a part by using the Inquire tool.

To check the sequence of a part:

1. Click  Tools > Inquire > Object.

2. Select a part.

Tekla Structures displays the properties of the part. The sequence name and number aredisplayed under More. For example:

See also Sequences (p. 172)

Modifying the sequence number of a part

Before you start, assign a sequence number to a user-defined attribute of a part.

To modify the sequence number of a part:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.2. Click  User-defined attributes...

The current sequence number is displayed next to the user-defined attribute to which youassigned the sequence number. For example, MY_INFO_1.

3. Modify the sequence number.

4. Click  Modify.

See also Sequences (p. 172)

Deleting a sequence

To delete a sequence:1. Click  Tools > Sequencer....

You cannot add new parts to a sequence, unless the new part is at the endof the sequence. If the sequence changes, you must redefine the wholesequence.

Page 174: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 174/260

 

174 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

2. Select a sequence name from the list.

3. Click  Delete and then click Yes.

See also Sequences (p. 172)

7.4 Lotting

With lots you can group assemblies for transporting to site. Lotting means that you evaluatespecific model parts with respect to the number of units that can be carried by a transfervehicle. For example, you can calculate how many concrete truck deliveries are needed to pourthe footings or slabs for a specific portion of the model. With this information, it is easier todetermine area requirements and create an erection schedule.

When you define lots, you must take into account the load-carrying capacity of the vehicle,because a lot cannot exceed the maximum total load capacity. You can calculate truck loadsizes based on material weights and model quantities. For most model parts, the weight is basedon the size, length, and material of the part.

You can use lotting in conjunction with the Sequencer tool. For example, you can load eachpart of the model onto a specific truck based on the erection sequence of the part.

The basic lotting process is the same for steel and concrete parts. However, if you are usingcast-in-place concrete, remember that the concrete is transported in a volumetric container (forexample, in a ten-cubic-yard truck). In that case, you must calculate the weight-carrying

capacity of the concrete vehicle before defining the number of lots.

See also Creating a lot (p. 174)

Adding parts to a lot (p. 175)

Removing parts from a lot (p. 175)

Deleting a lot (p. 175)

Sequences (p. 172)

Creating a lo t

To create a lot:1. Click  Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.

2. Click  Properties... to display the Lot Properties dialog box.

3. Type a name in the field at the bottom of the dialog box.

4. Type a lot number in the Number field.

5. Type the maximum weight of the lot in the Max weight field.

6. Click  Add.

Tekla Structures creates an empty lot with the defined properties.

See also Lotting (p. 174)

To view the properties of a part, right-click the part and then selectInquire > Part or Properties...

Page 175: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 175/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 175

Advanced Modeling

 Adding parts to a lot

After you have created the needed lots, you must select each part of the model and assign themto a lot until the total load weight of the lot reaches the specified target.

To add parts to a lot:

1. Click  Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.2. Select an existing lot from the list.

Tekla Structures highlights the parts included in the lot. The total weight of the lot andthe number of assemblies it contains are displayed under Applied values.

3. Hold down Shift and select the parts that you want to add to the lot.

4. Click  Apply selected.

The weight and number of the added parts is displayed under Current values. TeklaStructures displays a warning message if the weight limit of the lot is exceeded.

5. Click  OK to close the dialog box.

When you re-open the dialog box, the Applied values include the weight and number of the parts you added.

See also Lotting (p. 174)

Removing parts from a lot

To remove parts from a lot:

1. Click  Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.

2. Select an existing lot from the list.

Tekla Structures highlights the parts included in the lot.

3. Hold down Ctrl and select the parts you want to remove from the lot.

Tekla Structures deselects the parts.

4. Click  Apply selected.

5. Click  OK to close the dialog box.

See also Lotting (p. 174)

Deleting a lotTo delete a lot:

1. Click  Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.

2. Click  Properties...

3. Select an existing lot from the list.

4. Click  Delete.

See also Lotting (p. 174)

Always use the Shift key when adding parts to an existing lot. If yousimply select parts, you will overwrite the contents of the lot. When youhold down Shift, you cannot select parts that already belong to anotherlot.

Page 176: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 176/260

 

176 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

7.5 Parametric modeling

Tekla Structures models are parametric, which means that each model object has parametersthat define various properties, including its geometry, location and relationship to other parts.

You can use these parameters to:

• Create variables that define the properties of the model object, such as a beam or column.

Variables can define fixed properties, such as the name of a column. They can also includeformulas, so that Tekla Structures calculates the property value each time you use themodel object.

• Create dependencies , or relationships, between model objects, so the properties of one

model object adjust if you change the related model object.

For example, you might create a dependency that offsets a column a fixed distance from aplane on a wall, so that when you move the wall, the column follows.

See also Defining variables

Creating distance variables

Creating reference distances

Parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures (p. 176)

Parametric profi les available in Tekla Structures

These are the parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures:

HIh-s-t*b (symmetric)

HIh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2

PHIh1-h2-s-t*b (symmetric)

PHIh1-h2-s-t1*b1-t2*b2

BLLh*b*t

BLZh*b*t

Page 177: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 177/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 177

Advanced Modeling

BLUh*b*t

PLh*b

h=height

b=thickness

(smaller=b)

Dd

ELDd1*r1*d2*r2

PDd*t

EPDd1*r1*d2*r2*t

Ph*t

Ph*b*t

Ph1*b-h2*b*t

Page 178: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 178/260

 

178 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

HKh-s-t*b-c (symmetric)

HKh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2-c

HQh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2 (centered)

HQh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2-c

ZZh-t-e-b (symmetric)

ZZh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2

CCh-t-e-b (symmetric)

CCh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2

CWh-t-e-b-f-h1

CUh-t-h1-b-e (symmetric)

CUh-t-h1-b1-h2-b2/e

EBh-t-e-b-a (symmetric)

EBh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2-a

Reference points:1=right

2=left

3=top

Page 179: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 179/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 179

Advanced Modeling

BFh-s-b-h1

SPDd*t

SPDd1-d2*t

ECh-t-e-b-a (symmetric)

ECh-t-e1-b1-e1-b1-a

EDh-t-b-e-h1-h2-f1-f2-a

EEh-t-e-b-f1-f3-h1-f2-a

EFh-t-e-b1-b2-f1-f2/h1-a

Page 180: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 180/260

 

180 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

EZh-t-e-b-f1-f3-h1-f2-a

EWh-t-e-b-b-f1-f2-h2-h1-a

RCDLs*h-d*t (symmetric)

RCDLs*h-d*t1*t2

RCXXs*h-b*t*h1-h2-ex

RCLs*h-b*t

RCDXs*h-b*h2*h1 (symmetric)

RCDXs*h-b*h4*h3*h2*h1RCDXs*h-b*h4*h3*h2*h1-ex

RCXs*h-b*h2*h1

Page 181: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 181/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 181

Advanced Modeling

See also Parametric modeling (p. 176)

Parametric profiles (p. 53)

7.6 Sketched cross sectionsThis section explains how to create and modify your own cross sections, and how to use themin a model.

The cross sections you create using the cross section sketch editor can be parametric or fixed.You can change the dimensions of parametric cross sections each time you use them in amodel.

Contents Opening the cross section sketch editor (p. 181)

Sketching the outline of a cross section (p. 184)

Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)

Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)

Checking a sketched cross section (p. 197)

Saving a sketched cross section (p. 198)

Modifying a sketched cross section (p. 198)

Using sketched cross sections in a model (p. 201)

Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (p. 202)

Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross section (p. 204)

Opening the cross section sketch editor Use the cross section sketch editor to create and modify your own profile cross sections.

To open the cross section sketch editor:

1. Open a Tekla Structures model.

2. Click  Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section in Sketch Editor....

Tekla Structures opens the cross section sketch editor, the Sketch Browser, and theVariables dialog box.

Page 182: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 182/260

 

182 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

See also Sketch Browser (p. 182)

Variables (p. 183)

Sketch Browser The Sketch Browser shows the objects (lines, arcs, circles, constraints, dimensions, andchamfers) of a cross section sketch in a hierarchical, tree-like structure. The Sketch Browser automatically opens when you open the cross section sketch editor.

When you click an object in the cross section sketch editor, Tekla Structures highlights theobject in the Sketch Browser, and vice versa.

Page 183: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 183/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 183

Advanced Modeling

The Sketch Browser displays the following information about a cross section:

• Extrusion type (0, 1, or 2) and thickness of the sketch.

• Lines, arcs, and circles

• Constraints

• Distances and dimensions and their values• Chamfers and their type (0=None, 1=Line ... 7=Line and arc) and dimensions.

See also Opening the cross section sketch editor (p. 181)

Cross section extrusion types (p. 200)

Corner chamfer types and dimensions (p. 105)

VariablesUse the Variables dialog box to define the properties of a sketched cross section. Variables candefine fixed properties, or they can include formulas, so that Tekla Structures calculates theproperty value each time you use the profile in a model.

The Variables dialog box automatically opens when you open the cross section sketch editor.

Page 184: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 184/260

 

184 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

See also Opening the cross section sketch editor (p. 181)Defining variables

Display variables

Sketching the outline of a cross section

When you create a new cross section, start by sketching the outline and the holes of the crosssection using lines, arcs, and circles.

Ensure that you create a closed shape, unless you are creating a cross section of a consistentthickness, such as a cold rolled section.

See also Sketching a polyline (p. 184)

Sketching an arc (p. 185)

Sketching a circle (p. 185)

Sketching a polyline

You can create line segments in the cross section sketch editor by picking points. TeklaStructures automatically creates coincident constraints between the line segments and displaysa chamfer symbol where line segments meet.

To sketch a polyline:

1. Open the cross section sketch editor.

2. Click the Sketch polyline icon:

3. Pick points to create each line segment.

4. Click the middle mouse button to create the polyline.

The maximum number of points in a sketched cross section is 100.

Page 185: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 185/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 185

Advanced Modeling

See also Sketching the outline of a cross section (p. 184)

Sketching an arcYou can create an arc in the cross section sketch editor by picking three points.

To sketch an arc:

1. Open the cross section sketch editor.

2. Click the Sketch arc icon:

3. Pick three points to define the arc.

See also Sketching the outline of a cross section (p. 184)

Sketching a circleYou can create a circle in the cross section sketch editor by picking two points.

To sketch a circle:

1. Open the cross section sketch editor.

2. Click the Sketch circle icon:

3. Pick a point to indicate the center of the circle (1).

4. Pick a point to indicate the radius of the circle (2).

Page 186: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 186/260

 

186 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

See also Sketching the outline of a cross section (p. 184)

Refining the shape of a sketched cross section

After you have sketched the outline of a cross section, use constraints to refine your sketchand lock the shape. For example, you can straighten lines, create 90 degree angles, force linesto meet, close the shape, and add chamfers in corners.

To straighten the entire profile, use horizontal and vertical constraints in conjunction with otherconstraints. Although the shape is locked, you can still rotate the profile in the model.

See also Adding a parallel constraint (p. 186)

Adding a perpendicular constraint (p. 187)

Adding a coincident constraint (p. 187)

Adding a fixed constraint (p. 188)

Adding a horizontal constraint (p. 188)

Adding a vertical constraint (p. 189)

Deleting a constraint (p. 189)

 Adding a parallel constraintYou can force two lines in a sketched cross section to be parallel to each other.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a parallel constraint:

1. Click the Parallel constraint icon:

2. Select a line in the sketch (1).

3. Select another line in the sketch (2).

Page 187: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 187/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 187

Advanced Modeling

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)

 Adding a perpendicular constraintYou can force a line in a sketched cross section to be at a 90 degree angle to another line youselect. The lines do not have to intersect.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a perpendicular constraint:

1. Click the Perpendicular constraint icon:

2. Select a line in the sketch (1).

3. Select another line in the sketch (2).

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)

 Adding a coincident constraintYou can force two lines in a sketched cross section to start or end at the same point, byextending or shortening one or both lines. The lines do not have to intersect.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a coincident constraint:

Tekla Structures automatically creates coincident constraints:

• Where two lines meet.

• Between line segments when you draw them with the Sketch

polyline tool.

• Between the start of the first line segment and the end of the last line

segment in a shape, if they are within a certain distance of eachother.

Page 188: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 188/260

 

188 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

1. Ensure that the Snap to end points snap switch is active.

2. Click the Coincident constraint icon:

3. Pick the end of the first line (1).4. Pick the end of the second line. (2)

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)

 Adding a fixed constraintYou can lock the position and angle of a line in a sketched cross section so that other constraintsdo not affect it.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a fixed constraint:

1. Click the Fixed constraint icon:

2. Select a line in the sketch.

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)

 Adding a horizontal constraintUse horizontal constraints to force a line in a sketched cross section to be parallel to the local xaxis. Tekla Structures automatically creates horizontal constraints when you create lines thatare nearly horizontal.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a horizontal constraint:

1. Click the Horizontal constraint icon:

2. Select the lines you want to straighten (1, 2).

Page 189: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 189/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 189

Advanced Modeling

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)

 Adding a vertical constraintUse vertical constraints to force a line in a sketched cross section to be parallel to the local yaxis. Tekla Structures automatically creates vertical constraints when you create lines that are

nearly vertical.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a vertical constraint:

1. Click the Vertical constraint icon:

2. Select the lines you want to straighten (1, 2).

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)

Deleting a constraint

To delete a constraint from a sketched cross section:

1. Click to open the Sketch Browser.

2. Select the constraint you want to delete.

3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.

4. Click  Refresh.

See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)

Page 190: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 190/260

 

190 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

 Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section

After you have sketched a cross section, use dimensions to make different distances in the crosssection parametric. You can use these dimensions to define the size of the profile cross sectionwhen you use it in a model.

Tekla Structures also adds the dimensions you create to the list of variables that you can use in

calculations.

See also Adding a radial dimension to a sketch (p. 190)

Adding an angle dimension to a sketch (p. 191)

Adding a dimension between two points in a sketch (p. 191)

Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch (p. 192)

Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch (p. 192)

Deleting a dimension from a sketch (p. 193)

 Adding a radial dimension to a sketchYou can create a radial dimension for an arc or a circle in a sketched cross section.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.To add a radial dimension:

1. Click the Sketch radial dimension icon:

2. Select the arc or circle.

Do not create too many dimensions in a sketch, or the dimensions willnot be able to adjust when the values are changed.

In the following example, if you create the dimension marked in red, thedimension b1 will no longer work:

Page 191: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 191/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 191

Advanced Modeling

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)

 Adding an angle dimension to a sketchYou can create an angle dimension between two lines in a sketched cross section. The angle iscalculated anti-clockwise from the first line you select.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add an angle dimension:

1. Click the Sketch angle dimension icon:

2. Select the first line (1).

3. Select the second line (2).

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)

 Adding a dimension between two points in a sketchYou can add a dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a dimension between two points in a sketch:

1. Click the Sketch free dimension icon:

2. Pick a point to indicate the starting point of the dimension (1).

3. Pick a point to indicate the end point of the dimension (2).

If you are unable to see the angle symbol, scroll with the mouse wheel tozoom in.

Page 192: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 192/260

 

192 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

4. Pick a point to indicate the location of the dimension lines and text.

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)

 Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch

You can add a horizontal dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a horizontal dimension to a sketch:

1. Click the Sketch horizontal dimension icon:

2. Pick a point to indicate the starting point of the dimension (1).

3. Pick a point to indicate the end point of the dimension (2).

4. Pick a point to indicate the location of the dimension lines and text.

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)

 Adding a vertical dimension to a sketchYou can add a vertical dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.

Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To add a vertical dimension to a sketch:

1. Click the Sketch vertical dimension icon:

2. Pick a point to indicate the starting point of the dimension (1).3. Pick a point to indicate the end point of the dimension (2).

Page 193: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 193/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 193

Advanced Modeling

4. Pick a point to indicate the location of the dimension lines and text.

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)

Deleting a dimension from a sketchTo delete a dimension from a sketched cross section:

1. Select the dimension you want to delete.

2. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)

Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section

When you sketch a cross section, you can define positioning planes for it. With positioningplanes you can determine the planes Tekla Structures will use for positioning parts andcomponents.

See also Part positioning planes (p. 193)

Connection positioning planes (p. 194)Showing and hiding positioning planes (p. 195)

Moving positioning planes (p. 195)

Moving positioning plane handles (p. 196)

Reverting to default positioning planes (p. 197)

Part positioning planesWith part positioning planes you can determine how Tekla Structures positions parts thathave a sketched profile cross section. These planes are used for the On plane and At depth settings for parts, and also when placing custom components that are bound to boundaryplanes.

The part positioning planes are displayed in blue:

Page 194: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 194/260

 

194 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

The On plane options Left and Right are set according to the vertical blue planes, and theMiddle option is halfway between them.

The same principle applies to the At depth setting: the Front and Behind options are set

according to the horizontal blue planes, and the Middle option is halfway between them.

Example You can define part positioning planes so that an asymmetric cross section will be positionedaccording to its web only. In the following example, the Middle option is illustrated in gray

dotted lines:

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)

Connection positioning planes

With connection positioning planes you can determine how Tekla Structures positionscomponents in relation to the component main part that has a sketched profile cross section.

Middle option

Page 195: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 195/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 195

Advanced Modeling

The connection positioning planes are displayed in green:

Example The following image shows the default connection positioning planes of a double tee slab that

was created as a sketched cross section. The green line illustrates the default connectionpositioning planes.

To place connections according to the location of the stems of the double tee, move theconnection positioning planes as shown below.

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)

Showing and hiding positioning planesBefore you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To show or hide the positioning planes, do one of the following:

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)

Moving positioning planes

To move positioning planes:

To Do this

Show or hide the part positioningplanes Click .

Show or hide the connectionpositioning planes Click .

Page 196: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 196/260

 

196 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

1. Display the positioning planes you want to move.

2. Select the positioning planes.

3. Select one of the positioning plane handles.

4. Right-click and select a Move command from the pop-up menu.

5. Move the planes like any other object in Tekla Structures.

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)

Showing and hiding positioning planes (p. 195)

Moving an object

Moving positioning plane handlesYou can move the handles of each positioning plane. If you move the handles away from theoutmost corners of the sketched cross section, you must bind them by adding a dimension toeach handle. Otherwise the positioning will not function correctly in the model.

To move the positioning plane handles:

1. Click the positioning plane to display the handles.

The handles are displayed in pink. By default, the handles are at the outmost corners of the sketched cross section. For example:

2. Click a handle to select it.3. Move the handle like any other object in Tekla Structures. For example:

a Right-click and select Move.

b Pick the origin for moving.

c Pick a destination point.

4. If the handle is not at the outmost corner of the cross section, add a dimension betweenthe handle and the corner.

Example In the following examples, the left handle of the positioning plane has been bound by using ahorizontal dimension (b1):

The same handle controls both the vertical and horizontal plane, so you

can move them both at the same time.

Page 197: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 197/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 197

Advanced Modeling

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)

Reverting to default positioning planesYou can revert back to the default positioning planes of a sketched cross section if you havemoved the planes.

To revert to the default positioning planes, do one of the following:

See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)

Checking a sketched cross section

To check that the constraints and dimensions in a sketched cross section work correctly:

1. Double-click a dimension line to open the Distance Properties dialog box.

2. Change the Value field.

3. Click  Modify.

Tekla Structures updates the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.

To Do this

Revert to the default part positioning planes 1. Click to show the part positioning planes.

2. Select the part positioning planes.

3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-upmenu.

4. Click again to check that the planes have

reverted back to the default.

Revert to the default connection positioning planes 1. Click to show the connection positioning

planes.

2. Select the connection positioning planes.

3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-upmenu.

4. Click again to check that the planes havereverted back to the default.

Page 198: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 198/260

 

198 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

4. Check that the shape of the profile does not change and that the dimensions adjustcorrectly.

5. Click  Cancel to close the Distance Properties dialog box.

See also Using sketched cross sections in a model (p. 201)

Saving a sketched cross section

Tekla Structures saves the cross section in the current model folder. The sketched cross sectionsare available in the Others section in the profile catalog.

To save a sketched cross section, do one of the following:

See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)

Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (p. 202)

Modifying a sketched cross section

You can modify existing cross section sketches, for example, by modifying chamfers ordimensions. You can also move corners or holes by moving the handles. The chamfers aremoved automatically when you move the handles.

Note the following limitations when naming cross sections:

• You cannot use the name of a standard profile.

• You cannot include numbers, special characters, or blank spaces in

the cross section name.

• Lower case letters are automatically converted into upper case

letters.

To Do this

Save a new cross section

1. Click  Save sketch .

2. Type a name in the Prefix field, and then click OK.

Update an existing cross section

1. Click  Save sketch .

2. Click  Yes when prompted to update the existingcross section.

Save a copy of the cross sectionunder a different name 1. Click  Save sketch as .

2. Type a new name in the Prefix field, and then click OK.

Sketched cross sections are saved in the xslib.db1 file, which is alibrary file that contains custom components and sketches. Ordinaryprofiles are saved in the profdb.bin file.

Page 199: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 199/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 199

Advanced Modeling

To modify a sketched cross section:

1. Click  Modeling > Profiles > Edit Cross Section in Sketch Editor...

The Component Catalog dialog box opens.

2. Double-click a cross section to open it in the cross section sketch editor.

Sketched cross sections have the symbol next to their name.

3. Double-click an object to modify its properties.

The sketch objects you can modify appear in yellow.

4. Modify the object properties.

5. Click  Modify in the object properties dialog box.

6. Close the object properties dialog box.

7. Click the Save sketch as icon to save the changes.

See also Modifying chamfers in a sketch (p. 199)

Setting the sketch thickness (p. 199)

Modifying chamfers in a sketchYou can change the shape and dimensions of chamfers in a sketched cross section. Forexample, you can create rounded cross section corners.

To modify a chamfer:

1. Double-click a chamfer symbol in the cross section sketch editor.

2. In the Chamfer Properties dialog box, change the shape and dimensions of the chamfer.

3. Click  Modify.

4. Click  OK to close the dialog box.

5. Click the Save sketch as icon to save the changes.

See also Modifying a sketched cross section (p. 198)

Corner chamfer types and dimensions (p. 105)

Setting the sketch thicknessIf you have sketched an open shape, such as a cold rolled section, you must define the extrusiontype and thickness of the sketch in the Sketch Browser. The thickness can be either fixed orparametric.

• You cannot change dimensions that have been calculated using

formulas in the Variables dialog box.

• Constraints may also prevent you from changing dimensions.

Page 200: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 200/260

 

200 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

To set the thickness of a sketch:

1. In the cross section sketch editor, sketch an open polyline.

2. Do one of the following:

• To set a fixed thickness:

a In the Sketch Browser, right-click Thickness and select Add Equation from

the pop-up menu.b Type the value of the thickness after =.

• To define a parametric thickness:

a In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter variable for Length (forexample, P1).

b In the Formula column, define the default value for the parameter variable.

c In the Sketch Browser, right-click Thickness and select Add Equation fromthe pop-up menu.

d Type the name of the parameter variable (for example, P1) after =.

3. To define the extrusion type:

a In the Sketch Browser, right-click Extrusion Type and select Add Equation 

from the pop-up menu.b Type the extrusion type number (0, 1, or 2) after =.

4. Click the Save sketch as icon to save the changes.

See also Modifying a sketched cross section (p. 198)

Cross section extrusion types (p. 200)

Cross section extrusion typesThe extrusion type defines how a cross section of a consistent thickness is extruded. When youchange the thickness, the profile grows inwards, outwards, or symmetrically in both directions,depending on the extrusion type. You must define the extrusion type for cross sections that

consist of an open polyline.

The extrusion types are:

Page 201: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 201/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 201

Advanced Modeling

See also Setting the sketch thickness (p. 199)

Using sketched cross sections in a modelOnce you have created a cross section and saved it in the profile catalog, you are ready to use itin the model. If you have applied constraints correctly, the shape of the profile will bemaintained when you change its dimensions.

To use a sketched cross section for a new part in a model:

1. Double-click a toolbar button to open the part properties dialog box.

2. Open the Select Profile dialog box.

• For steel parts, click the Select... button next to the Profile field.

• For concrete parts, click the button next to the Shape field.

3. Open the Others branch at the end of the profile tree.

4. Select a profile with the sketched cross section.

5. Optional: If the cross section is parametric, define its dimensions in the Value column onthe General tab.

6. Click  OK to apply the changes.

7. Pick points to place the part in the model.

See also Creating an image of a sketched cross section (p. 201)

Creating an image of a sketched cross sectionTo illustrate the shape and dimensions of your profile cross section, you can create an image of the cross section you have sketched. Tekla Structures displays the image when you browse forsketched profiles in the profile catalog.

Type Description Image

0 The sketch is extrudedsymmetrically to the outside andinside of the polyline.

(Default)

1 The sketch is extruded to theoutside of the polyline.

2 The sketch is extruded to theinside of the polyline.

Page 202: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 202/260

 

202 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

The image must be in Windows bitmap format (*.bmp) and can be created with any bitmapeditor, for example Microsoft Paint. You can also take a screenshot of your cross section in thecross section sketch editor and use that image.

To create an image of a sketched cross section using a screenshot:

1. Open the cross section sketch editor.

2. Click the sketch to ensure it is the active view.

3. Press F12 on your keyboard to take a screenshot of the sketch without the borders.

Tekla Structures saves the screenshot in the..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\snapshots folder.

4. Open the screenshot in any graphics editor (for example, Microsoft Paint) and modifythe image if necessary.

5. Save the image in bmp format in the ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder.

Use the cross section name as the filename, for example, mysketch.bmp.

See also Using sketched cross sections in a model (p. 201)

Creating a screenshot (p. 124)

Saving a screenshot in bitmap format (p. 125)

Importing and exporting sketched cross sectionsTo use a sketched cross section in other Tekla Structures models, you have to export the crosssection to a file (*.uel), and then import the file into another Tekla Structures model.

Use the Component Catalog to import and export sketched cross sections. They have thefollowing symbols and numbers in the Component Catalog:

See also Importing sketched cross sections (p. 203)

Exporting sketched cross sections (p. 203)

Page 203: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 203/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 203

Advanced Modeling

Importing sketched cross sectionsAfter you have exported sketched cross sections to a file, you can import the cross sections toanother Tekla Structures model.

To import sketched cross sections:

1. Open the Tekla Structures model you want to import to.

2. Press Ctrl+F to open the Component Catalog.3. Optional: To view the sketched cross sections and profiles already available in the

current model, select Sketched profiles from the list box.

4. In the component list, right-click and select Import... from the pop-up menu.

5. In the Import Components dialog box, browse for the folder which contains theexported file (*.uel).

6. Select the file to import.

7. Click  OK.

See also Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (p. 202)

Exporting the profile catalog

Exporting elements from the profile catalog

Exporting sketched cross sectionsTo export sketched cross sections:

1. Open the Tekla Structures model you want to export from.

2. Press Ctrl+F to open the Component Catalog.

3. Select Sketched profiles from the list.

Tekla Structures lists all the sketched cross sections available in the current model.

4. Select the cross sections you want to export. To export several cross sections, hold downthe Ctrl key when selecting.

5. Right-click and select Export... from the pop-up menu.6. In the Export Components dialog box, enter a name for the export file in the Selection 

box.

7. Optional: To save the export file to a specific location, browse for the folder.

By default, Tekla Structures saves the export file in the current model folder.

8. Click  OK.

See also Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (p. 202)

If you have created a profile using a sketched cross section and want touse the profile in another model, you need to import both the crosssection and profile. To use profiles from a model, you can either exportand then import the entire profile catalog or a part of it, or copy theprofdb.bin file.

To automatically import all *.uel files from a folder when creating anew model, use the advanced option XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER.

Page 204: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 204/260

 

204 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross section

This example shows how to create a cross section using variables. You will create a symmetricC-shaped cross section with the dimensions b1 = b2 and h2 = h3. When you use the profile inthe model, you can change the following dimensions:

• Width (b1)

• Total height (h1)

• Height (h2)

• Thickness (P1)

• Chamfers (P2)

In the following example, you will first sketch a C-shaped cross section and add dimensions toit. After that, you will set the cross section thickness and modify the chamfers. Finally, you willuse the cross section in a model.

See also Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross section (p. 204)

Example: Adding dimensions to the cross section (p. 205)

Example: Setting the cross section thickness (p. 206)

Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross section (p. 207)

Example: Using the cross section in a model (p. 208)

Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross sectionTo sketch the outline of a C-shaped cross section:

1. Open the cross section sketch editor.

2. Use the Sketch polyline command to create a rough C-shaped cross section.

At this stage, the cross section does not have to be symmetric or have the rightdimensions.

Page 205: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 205/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 205

Advanced Modeling

3. Straighten the lines using the Add horizontal constraint and Add vertical

constraint commands.

4. Save the cross section and name it CSHAPE.

See also Opening the cross section sketch editor (p. 181)

Sketching a polyline (p. 184)

Adding a horizontal constraint (p. 188)

Adding a vertical constraint (p. 189)

Saving a sketched cross section (p. 198)

Example: Adding dimensions to the cross sectionTo add dimensions to the cross section:

1. Use the Sketch horizontal dimension command to create the distances b1 and

b2.

Page 206: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 206/260

 

206 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

2. Use the Sketch vertical dimension command to create the distances h1, h2, and

h3.

3. In the Variables dialog box, enter the following values for the distances:

4. Ensure that Visibility is set to Show for the distances b1, h1, and h2.

5. Save the cross section.

See also Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch (p. 192)

Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch (p. 192)

Saving a sketched cross section (p. 198)

Variables (p. 183)

Example: Setting the cross section thickness

To set the cross section thickness:

Page 207: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 207/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 207

Advanced Modeling

1. In the Variables dialog box, do the following:

a Click  Add to add a parameter variable P1.

b In the Formula box, enter 20.00.

c In the Visiblity box, select Show.

d In the Label in dialog box box, enter Thickness.

2. In the Sketch Browser, set the cross section thickness using the parameter variable P1.

a Right-click  Thickness, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and thenenter =P1.

b Right-click  ExtrusionType, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and thenenter =2 to get the sketch extruded to the inside of the polyline.

3. Save the cross section.

See also Variables (p. 183)

Sketch Browser (p. 182)

Cross section extrusion types (p. 200)

Saving a sketched cross section (p. 198)

Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross section

To modify the chamfers of the cross section:

1. Double-click one of the cross section chamfers.

2. In the Chamfer Properties dialog box, do the following:

a Change the chamfer type to Line .

b Click  Modify.

c Repeat steps a–b for all the cross section chamfers.

3. In the Variables dialog box, do the following:

a Click  Add to add a parameter variable P2.

b In the Formula box, enter 10.00.

c In the Visiblity box, select Show.

d In the Label in dialog box box, enter Chamfer.

Page 208: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 208/260

 

208 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

4. In the Sketch Browser, do the following:

a Double-click  Chamfer constraint to open the chamfer properties.

b Right-click  Chamfer X, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and thenenter =P2.

c Enter the same value for Chamfer Y.

d Repeat steps a–d for all the cross section chamfers.

5. Save the cross section.

See also Modifying chamfers in a sketch (p. 199)

Variables (p. 183)

Sketch Browser (p. 182)

Saving a sketched cross section (p. 198)

Example: Using the cross section in a modelTo use the cross section in a model:

1. Double-click a toolbar button open the part properties dialog box.

2. Open the Select Profile dialog box.

• For steel parts, click the Select... button next to the Profile field.

• For concrete parts, click the button next to the Shape field.

3. Open the Others branch at the end of the profile tree, and select the CSHAPE profile.

4. Optional: Modify the dimensions of the cross section profile on the General tab.

5. Click  OK to apply the changes.

6. Pick points to place the part in the model.

Page 209: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 209/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 209

Advanced Modeling

See also Modifying a sketched cross section (p. 198)

Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)

Page 210: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 210/260

 

210 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Advanced Modeling

Page 211: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 211/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 211

Modeling Settings

8 Modeling Settings

This section provides more information about the various settings you can modify in TeklaStructures.

Contents • General settings (p. 211)

• View settings (p. 215)

• Part properties (p. 217)

• Detail properties (p. 227)

• Numbering settings (p. 233)

8.1 General settings

This section provides more information about some general modeling settings.

See also Grid properties (p. 211)

Grid line properties (p. 212)

Point properties (p. 212)

Rotation settings (p. 213)

Color settings (p. 213)

Transparency settings (p. 214)

Screenshot settings (p. 214)

Grid properties

Use the Grid dialog box to view and modify the grid properties.

Page 212: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 212/260

 

212 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

See also Grids (p. 29)

Grid line properties

Use the Grid Line Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a single gridline.

See also Grid lines (p. 32)

Point properties

Use the Point Information dialog box to view and modify the properties of a point.

Option

Coordinates The coordinates of the grid in the global x, y, and z directions (xand y are relative, z is absolute).

• X - grid lines vertical to the work plane

• Y - grid lines horizontal to the work plane

• Z - elevations in the structure

Labels The names of the grid lines.

Line extensions Define how far the grid lines extend in the directions Left/Below and Right/Above.

Origin The coordinates of the grid origin in the global x, y, and zdirections.

Magnetic grid plane Select to bind objects to grid lines.

User-defined

attributes...

Click to access the user-defined properties of the grid.

Option

Label The name of the grid line.

Depth in view plane The height of the grid plane perpendicular to the viewplane.

Extension Left/Below Define how far the grid lines extend in the directions Left/

Below and Right/Above.Extension Right/Above

Magnetic grid plane Select to bind objects to the grid line.

User-defined attributes... Click to access the user-defined properties of the grid line.

Visible in drawings Select to make the grid line visible in drawings.

Grid line automatic

dimensioning

Select to use single grid lines in grid dimensioning.

Option

Phase The phase number.

You can filter objects by their phase numbers.

Page 213: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 213/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 213

Modeling Settings

See also Points (p. 42)

Rotation settings

Use the Copy - Rotate and Move - Rotate dialog boxes to view and modify the settings that areused when you rotate objects in Tekla Structures.

See also Rotating objects

Color settings

Use the Object Representation dialog box to define the color of object groups.

See also Object representation settings (p. 133)

Id The ID number, which is used in log files.

You can filter objects by their ID numbers.

Coordinates The local (work plane) and global x, y, and z coordinates of apoint. Indicates the correct location of the point.

Option

Option

X0 The x and y coordinates of the starting point of the rotation axis.

Y0

Origin angle The angle of the rotation axis when rotating around a line on thework plane.

Number of copies Defines the number of copies created.

dZ The difference in position between the original and copied object inthe z direction.

Rotation angle The rotation angle between the original and new position.

Around Defines whether the rotation axis is a line on the work plane or inthe z direction.

Option

As is The current color is used.

If the object belongs to one of the object groups defined in thefollowing rows, its color is defined by the settings that the object

group in question has on that row.Colors Select color from the list.

Color by class All parts are colored according to their Class property.

Color by lot Parts belonging to different lots get different colors.

Color by phase Parts belonging to different phases get different colors.

Color by analysis type Displays parts according to the member analysis type.

Color by analysis

utility check

Displays parts according to the utilization ratio in analysis.

Color by attribute Displays parts in different colors according to the values of auser-defined attribute.

Page 214: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 214/260

 

214 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

Transparency settings

Use the Object Representation dialog box to define the transparency of object groups.

See also Object representation settings (p. 133)

Screenshot settings

Use the Screenshot dialog box to view and modify the screenshot settings.

The following screenshot options are only available in rendered views:

Option

As is The current visibility.

If the object belongs to any object group whose visibility andcolor settings have been defined, the settings will be read fromthat object group.

Visible Object is shown in the views.

50% transparent Object is transparent in rendered views.

70% transparent

90% transparent

Hidden Object is not shown in the views.

Option

View name Shows the selected view name.

View Includes the view content and window borders in thescreenshot.

View without borders Includes only the view content in the screenshot.

Rendered view For high resolution screenshots from rendered views. TheOptions... button displays the Screenshot Options dialog box.

Place on clipboard Places the screenshot on the clipboard.

Print to file Saves the screenshot to a file.

Option

Final width The width of the screenshot.Uses the same unit as other dimensions in modeling.

Final height The height of the screenshot.

Uses the same unit as other dimensions in modeling.

DPI The pixel density (DPI) of the screenshot.

There are limitations to pixel density. You can change the DPIusing a graphics editor.

White background Uses white background.

Smooth lines Uses smooth lines to decrease jagged edges.

Line width Sets the line width.

Page 215: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 215/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 215

Modeling Settings

See also Creating a screenshot (p. 124)

8.2 View settings

This section provides more information about specific view settings.

See also View properties (p. 215)

Grid view properties (p. 215)

Display settings (p. 216)

View properties

Use the View Properties dialog box to view and modify the view properties.

See also Views (p. 33)

Grid view properties

Use the Creation of Views Along Grid Lines dialog box to view and modify the properties of 

grid views.

Option

Name The name of the view.

Angle Whether the view angle is Plane or 3D.

Projection The projection type of rendered views.

Orthogonal: All objects are of equal size (no perspective).When you zoom, text and point size remains the same. Inaddition, the zoom remains on part surfaces.

Perspective: Distant objects appear smaller than close ones, asdo text and points. You can zoom, rotate the model, or flythrough it.

Rotation How the view is rotated around the z and x axes. Rotation isview-specific.

View type The appearance of the model in the view.

Color and transparency

in all views

The color and transparency setting that is used in all views(according to the status of the objects in the model).

Representation... Opens the Object Representation dialog box for definingcolor and transparency settings.

View depth The thickness of the displayed slice of model. You can definethe depth separately upwards and downwards from the viewplane. Only objects positioned within the view depth arevisible in the model.

Display... Opens the Display dialog box for defining which objects aredisplayed in the view and how.

Visible object group Which object group is displayed in the view.

Object group... Opens the Object Group - View Filter dialog box for creatingand modifying object groups.

Page 216: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 216/260

 

216 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

See also Creating grid views (p. 38)

Display settings

Use the Display dialog box to define which object types Tekla Structures displays and howthey appear in the model. Some of these settings may affect system performance.

Option

View plane The plane of the view defined by two axes similarly to thedefault view.

Number of views Defines which grid lines the views will be created of.

None does not create any views.

One (First) only creates the view closest to the grid origin.

One (Last) only creates the view furthest from the grid origin.

All creates all views in grid planes in the relevant direction.

View name prefix The prefix to be used with the grid label in the view name. Thisname overrides the name in the view properties.

View names consist of a prefix and a grid label, e.g. PLAN+3000. If the View name prefix field is left empty, no prefix isused. Tekla Structures adds a dash and a running number to theview name if view names are otherwise identical.

View properties Defines which view properties (applied or saved) will be used.

Each view plane has its own view properties. You can load theproperties from the current view properties with the option<applied values> or from saved view properties. The Show... button displays the current view properties.

Option

Parts Defines how parts are displayed.

Fast uses a rapid drawing technique that displays internal hiddenedges, but skips cuts.

Exact displays the cuts, but hides the internal hidden lines of parts.

Reference line shows parts as sticks. This option increasesdisplay speed significantly, when viewing the entire model, orlarge parts of it.

Bolts Defines how bolts are displayed.

Fast displays the axis and a cross to represent the bolt head. Thisis the recommended representation mode for bolts, because itincreases display speed significantly and consumes less systemmemory.

Exact shows bolts, washers, and nuts as solids.

Page 217: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 217/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 217

Modeling Settings

See also Defining which objects are displayed (p. 128)

8.3 Part properties

This section provides more information about the properties of specific steel and concrete parts.

See also Steel column properties (p. 218)

Steel beam properties (p. 218)

Contour plate properties (p. 219)

Orthogonal beam properties (p. 220)Twin profile properties (p. 221)

Pad footing properties (p. 222)

Strip footing properties (p. 223)

Concrete column properties (p. 224)

Concrete beam properties (p. 225)

Concrete slab properties (p. 225)

Concrete panel properties (p. 226)

Holes Defines how holes are displayed.

Fast only displays the circle in the first plane. When using thisoption, Tekla Structures always displays fast holes on the first part(counting from the head of the bolt). If there are slotted holes in

any of the parts, a slotted hole is displayed on the first part, evenif the hole in that part is not slotted. The new slotted hole has thesame size and rotation as the first slotted hole (counting from thehead of the bolt).

Holes that are outside a part are always displayed as fast holes inrendered views.

Exact shows holes as solids.

Exact long holes only displays slotted holes in exact mode andordinary holes in fast mode.

Point size Defines the size of points in views. You can also change the sizeof the part handle using this field.

In model increases the point size on the screen when you zoomin.

In view does not increase the point size.

AutoStick Defines whether the objects are shown as sticks or as objects.This option is only available in wire frame views.

By dragging the sliders you can adjust the zoom distance whereobjects should be shown as reference lines.

This option increases performance significantly when viewinglarge models. It still lets you zoom in on a small area and displayit exactly.

Option

Page 218: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 218/260

 

218 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

Steel column properties

Use the Column Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a steel column.The file name extension of a column properties file is *.clm.

See also Creating a steel column (p. 66)

Steel beam properties

Use the Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a steel beam, steelpolybeam, or curved beam. The file name extension of a beam properties file is *.prt.

Option

Part prefix and start

number

The part mark series of the column.

Assembly prefix and

start number

The assembly mark series of the column.

Name The user-definable name of the column.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of the column.

Material The material of the column.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fireretardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group columns.

For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.

User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the column.

Vertical The position of the column, relative to its reference point.

Rotation How the column is rotated around its axis.

Horizontal The horizontal position of the column, relative to its referencepoint.

Top The position of the second end of the column in the global zdirection.

Bottom The position of the first end of the column in the global zdirection.

Analysis tab The analysis properties of the column.

Composite tab The analysis properties of the slabs in composite constructions.

Start releases tab The support conditions of the column ends.

End releases tab

Design tab The design information of the column.

Deforming tab Warping, cambering, and shortening of the column.

Page 219: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 219/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 219

Modeling Settings

See also Creating a steel beam (p. 67)

Contour plate properties

Use the Contour Plate Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a contourplate. The file name extension of a contour plate properties file is *.cpl.

Option

Part prefix and start

number

The part mark series of a beam.

Assembly prefix and

start number

The assembly mark series of the beam.

Name The user-definable name of a beam.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of a beam.

Material The material of a beam.

Finish The finish type.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group beams.

For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.

User-defined attributes User-defined properties of a beam.

On plane The position of a beam on the work plane.

Rotation How much a beam is rotated around its axis on the work plane.

At depth The position of a beam, in terms of depth perpendicular to thework plane.

End offset The offsets of beam ends relative to a beam’s reference line.

Radius The plane of curvature and radius of a curved beam.Number of segments The number of segments Tekla Structures uses when drawing

a curved beam.

Analysis tab The analysis properties of the beam.

Loading tab The loading properties of the beam.

Composite tab The analysis properties of the slabs in compositeconstructions.

Start releases tab The support conditions of the beam ends.

End releases tab

Design tab The design information of the beam.

Deforming tab Warping, cambering, and shortening of the beam.

Page 220: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 220/260

 

220 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

See also Creating a contour plate (p. 68)

Orthogonal beam properties

Use the Orthogonal Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of anorthogonal steel beam. The file name extension of an orthogonal beam properties file is*.crs.

Option

Part prefix and start

number

The part mark series of the contour plate.

Assembly prefix and

start number

The assembly mark series of the contour plate.

Name The user-definable name of the contour plate.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of the contour plate.

The format is PL+ thickness, for example PL20.

Material The material of the contour plate.

Finish The finish type.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,

fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group contour plates.

For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.

User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the contour plate.

At depth The position of the contour plate, in terms of depth,perpendicular to the work plane.

Analysis tab The analysis properties of the contour plate.

Loading tab The loading properties of the plate.

Spanning tab The spanning properties of the plate.

Design tab The design information of the contour plate.

Option

Part prefix and start

number

The part mark series of the beam.

Assembly prefix and

start number

The assembly mark series of the beam.

Name The user-definable name of the beam.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of the beam.

Material The material of the beam.

Page 221: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 221/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 221

Modeling Settings

See also Creating an orthogonal beam (p. 69)

Twin profile properties

Use the Twin Profile Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a twin steelprofile. The file name extension of a twin profile properties file is *.dia.

Finish The finish type.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group beams.

For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.

User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the beam.

Vertical The position of the beam, relative to its reference point.

Rotation How much the beam is rotated around its axis.

Horizontal The horizontal position of the beam, relative to its referencepoint.

Top The position of the second end of the beam in the z directionof the work plane.

Bottom The position of the first end of the beam in the z direction of the work plane.

Analysis tab The analysis properties of the beam.

Composite tab The analysis properties of the slabs in compositeconstructions.

Start releases tab The support conditions of the beam ends.

End releases tab

Design tab The design information of the beam.

Option

Option

Part prefix and start

number

The part mark series of the twin profile.

Assembly prefix and

start number

The assembly mark series of the twin profile.

Name The user-definable name of the twin profile.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of both the beams in the twin profile.

Material The material of the beams.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fireretardant coating, etc.

Page 222: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 222/260

 

222 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

See also Creating a twin profile (p. 70)

Pad footing properties

Use the Pad Footing Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a pad footing.The file name extension of a pad footing properties file is *.cpf.

Class Used to group twin profiles.

For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.

User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the twin profile.

On plane The position of the twin profile on the work plane.

Rotation Defines how the twin profile is rotated around its axis on thework plane.

At depth The beam position, in terms of depth, perpendicular to thework plane.

End offset The offsets of the ends of the beam, relative to the beam’sreference line.

Twin profile type Defines how the profiles are combined.

Horizontal The horizontal clearance between the profiles.

Vertical The vertical clearance between the profiles.

Analysis tab The analysis properties of the twin profile.

Composite tab The analysis properties of the slabs in composite constructions.

Start releases tab The support conditions of the twin profile ends.

End releases tab

Design tab The design information of the twin profile.

Option

Option

Name The user-definable name of the pad footing.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of the pad footing.

Material The material of the pad footing.

Finish The type of finish.Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group pad footings.

For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.

User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the pad footing.

Vertical The vertical position of the pad footing, relative to itsreference point.

Rotation How much the pad footing is rotated around its axis.

Page 223: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 223/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 223

Modeling Settings

See also Creating a pad footing (p. 78)

Strip footing properties

Use the Strip Footing Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a strip

footing. The file name extension of a strip footing properties file is *.csf.

Horizontal The horizontal position of the pad footing, relative to itsreference point.

Top The position of the top surface of the pad footing in the globalz direction.

Bottom The position of the bottom surface of the pad footing in theglobal z direction.

Cast unit prefix and

start number

Define the cast unit series of the pad footing.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the footing is precast or cast in place.

Option

Option

Name The user-definable name of the strip footing.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.

Shape The profile of the strip footing.

Material The material of the strip footing.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fireretardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group strip footings.

For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.

User-defined

attributes

User-defined properties of the strip footing.

On plane The position of the strip footing on the work plane.

Rotation How much the strip footing is rotated around its axis on thework plane.

At depth The position of the strip footing in terms of depth perpendicularto the work plane.

End offset The offsets of the ends of the strip footing relative to itsreference line.

Cast unit prefix and

start number

Define the cast unit series of the strip footing.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the footing is precast or cast in place.

Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved strip footing.

Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved strip footing.

Analysis tab The analysis properties of the strip footing.

Page 224: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 224/260

 

224 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

See also Creating a strip footing (p. 78)

Concrete column properties

Use the Concrete Column Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of aconcrete column. The file name extension of a concrete column properties file is *.ccl.

See also Creating a concrete column (p. 78)

Start releases tab The support conditions of the footing ends.

End releases tab

Design tab The design information of the footing.

Option

Option

Name The user-definable name of the column.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.

Profile The profile of the column.

Material The material of the column.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fireretardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group columns.

For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.

User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the column.

Vertical The vertical position of the column relative to its referencepoint.

Rotation How much the column is rotated around its axis.

Horizontal The horizontal position of the column relative to its referencepoint.

Top The position of the second end of the column in the global zdirection.

Bottom The position of the first end of the column in the global zdirection.

Cast unit prefix andstart number Define the cast unit series of the column.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the column is precast or cast in place.

Analysis tab The analysis properties of the column.

Start releases tab The support conditions of the column ends.

End releases tab

Design tab The design information of the column.

Deforming tab Warping, cambering and shortening of the column.

Page 225: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 225/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 225

Modeling Settings

Concrete beam properties

Use the Concrete Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concretebeam or polybeam. The file name extension of a concrete beam properties file is *.cbm.

See also Creating a concrete beam (p. 79)

Concrete slab properties

Use the Concrete Slab Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concreteslab. The file name extension of a concrete slab properties file is *.csl.

Option

Name The user-definable name of the beam.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.

Shape The profile of the beam.

Material The material of the beam.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group beams.

For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.

User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the beam.

On plane The beam position on the work plane.

Rotation How much the beam is rotated around its axis on the work plane.

At depth The position of the beam in terms of depth perpendicular tothe work plane.

End offset The offsets of the ends of the beam, relative to its referenceline.

Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved beam.

Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved beam.

Cast unit prefix and start

number

Define the cast unit series of the beam.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the beam is precast or cast in place.

Analysis tab The analysis properties of the beam.

Start releases tab The support conditions of the beam ends.

End releases tab

Loading tab The loading properties of the beam.

Design tab The design information of the beam.Deforming tab Warping, cambering and shortening of the beam.

Page 226: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 226/260

 

226 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

See also Creating a concrete slab (p. 80)

Concrete panel properties

Use the Concrete Panel Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concretepanel. The file name extension of a concrete panel properties file is *.cpn.

Option

Name The user-definable name of the slab.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.

Thickness The thickness of the slab.

Material The material of the slab.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group slabs.

For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.

User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the slab.

At depth The position of the slab, in terms of depth, perpendicular tothe work plane.

Analysis tab The analysis properties of the slab.

Spanning tab The spanning properties of the slab.

Loading tab The loading properties of the slab.

Design tab The design information of the slab.

Cast unit prefix and start

number

Define the cast unit series of the slab.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the slab is precast or cast in place.

Option

Name The user-definable name of the panel.

Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,

and to identify parts of the same type.

Shape The profile of the panel (thickness × height of the wall).

Material The material of the panel.

Finish The type of finish.

Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.

Class Used to group panels.

For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.

User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the panel.

Page 227: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 227/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 227

Modeling Settings

See also Creating a concrete panel (p. 81)

8.4 Detail properties

This section provides more information about the properties of specific modeling details.

See also Bolt properties (p. 227)

Weld properties (p. 229)

Weld types (p. 231)

Corner chamfer properties (p. 232)

Edge chamfer properties (p. 232)

Bolt properties

Use the Bolt Properties dialog box to view or modify the properties of a bolt group.

On plane The position of the panel on the work plane.

Rotation How much the panel is rotated around its axis on the work plane.

At depth The position of the panel, in terms of depth perpendicular tothe work plane.

End offset The offsets of the ends of the panel, relative to its referenceline.

Analysis tab The analysis properties of the panel.

Spanning tab The spanning properties of the panel.

Loading tab The loading properties of the panel.

Design tab The design information of the panel.

Cast unit prefix and start

number

Define the cast unit series of the panel.

Cast unit type Indicates whether the panel is precast or cast in place.

Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved panel.

Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved panel.

Option

Option

Bolt size Bolt diameter.

Bolt standard Bolt assembly standard/grade.

Bolt type Defines whether the bolts are assembled on-site or in the shop.

Connect part/

assembly

Indicates whether you are bolting a secondary part or a sub-assembly.

Thread in material Indicates if the thread of the bolt can be inside the bolted parts.Tekla Structures does not use this value when calculating the lengthof full-threaded bolts.

Page 228: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 228/260

 

228 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

Cut length Indicates which parts the bolt connects. The value defines the areaTekla Structures should search for parts that belong to the boltgroup. Using cut length you can determine whether the bolt will gothrough one flange or two.

Tekla Structures searches for parts using half the cut length value,in both directions from the bolt group plane. In the illustrationbelow, A is the cut length and B is the bolt origin. Tekla Structurescalculates the search area as A/2 in both directions from point B.

Tekla Structures warns you if the cut length is too small (i.e. thebolt group contains no parts) and makes the bolt length 100 mm.

If there are large gaps between the connected parts, the gap is addedto the length of the bolt. Tekla Structures calculates bolt lengthusing the the total distance between the first and last surfaces.

If you want to force a bolt to be a certain length, enter a negativevalue for cut length (e.g. -150).

Extra length Additional bolt length.

Increases the material thickness that Tekla Structures uses whencalculating bolt length. For example, you might need extra boltlength to allow for painting. You can also build additional lengthsinto bolt assemblies.

Shape Bolt group shape.

Bolt dist X Bolt spacing, number, or co-ordinate, depending on the bolt groupshape.

Bolt dist Y Bolt spacing, group diameter, or coordinate, depending on the boltgroup shape.

Tolerance Tolerance = Hole diameter - Bolt diameter

Hole type Oversized or slotted. Field activates after you select the Parts with

slotted holes check boxes.

Slotted hole X x allowance of a slotted hole. Zero for a round hole.

Slotted hole Y y allowance of a slotted hole. Zero for a round hole.

Rotate Slots If the bolt connects several parts, you may want to rotate alternateholes by 90 degrees. This allows the bolt to move in differentdirections.

Option

Page 229: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 229/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 229

Modeling Settings

See also Bolts (p. 85)

Weld properties

Use the Weld Properties dialog box to view or modify the properties of a weld.

On plane Moves the bolt group perpendicular to the bolt group x axis.

Rotation Defines how far the bolt group is rotated around the x axis, relativeto the current work plane.

For example, you can use this field to indicate on which side of theconnected parts you want the bolt head to be.

At depth Moves the bolt group perpendicular to the current work plane.

Dx, Dy, Dz Offsets that move the bolt group by moving the bolt group x axis.

Option

Some of the properties are only displayed in reports, not in drawings.

Option

Prefix See Weld size prefixes (p. 93).

Size The size of the weld.

If you enter a zero or negative weld size, Tekla Structures createsthe weld, but does not display it drawings.

Type See Weld types (p. 231).

Angle The angle of weld preparation, bevels, or groove.

Tekla Structures displays the angle between the weld type symboland the fill type contour symbol.

Contour The fill type contour of a weld can be:

• None

• Flush

• Convex

• Concave

Page 230: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 230/260

 

230 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

Finish Tekla Structures displays the finish symbol above the weld typesymbol in drawings. The options are:

• G (Grind)

• M (Machine)

• C (Chip)

• (Flush finished weld)

• (Smooth blended weld face)

Length The length of a regular weld depends on the length of theconnection between the welded parts. You can set the exact lengthof a polygon weld by, for example, defining the start and end pointsof the weld.

Intermittent weld Indicates whether the weld is an intermittent weld.

Intermittent welds are staggered on both sides of the part beingwelded. Tekla Structures shows the weld type symbols as staggeredin weld symbols.

Pitch The center-to-center spacing of welds for non-continuous welds.

To create a non-continuous weld, define the center-to-centerspacing and the pitch of the welds. Tekla Structures calculates thedistance between the welds as the pitch minus the length of theweld.

Tekla Structures uses the – character by default to separate weldlength and pitch, for example 50–100. To change the separator to@, for example, set the advanced optionXS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR to @.

Root face Root face thickness is the height of the narrowest part inside the

root opening. The RFT fields in the connection dialog boxes alsorefer to the root face thickness.

Neither root face nor RFT values appear in drawings, but you canuse the WELD_ROOT_FACE_THICKNESS field in reports to show theroot face dimension in the weld list.

Effective throat The weld size used in weld strength calculation.

Root opening The space between the welded parts.

Reference text Additional information to appear in the weld symbol. For example,information about the weld specification or process.

Edge/Around Indicates whether only one edge or the entire perimeter of a faceshould be welded.

A circle in the weld symbol in drawings indicates the Around option has been used.

Workshop/Site Indicates where the weld should be made. This setting affectsassemblies and drawings.

Tekla Structures indicates site welds in the weld symbol using aflag.

NDT inspection

level

Defines the non-desctructive testing and inspection level.

Connect part/

assembly

See Using welds to create assemblies (p. 72).

Position See Weld position (p. 92).

Option

Page 231: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 231/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 231

Modeling Settings

See also Welds (p. 91)

Weld types

Use the Weld Properties dialog box to define the weld type. Some weld types alsoautomatically prepare the parts to be welded. The following table shows the available weldtypes:

Electrode

classification

Defines the weld electrode classification.

Electrode strength Defines the electrode strength.

Electrode

coefficient

Defines the electrode strength coefficient.

Welding process

type

Defines the process type.

Option

Weldtype Name Number Preparation

None 0 No

Fillet weld 10 No

Bevel-groove (single-V buttweld)

3 Both parts

Bevel-groove (single-bevelbutt weld)

4 Secondary part

Square-groove (square buttweld)

2 No

Single-V butt weld withbroad root face

5 Both edges

Single-bevel butt weld withbroad root face

6 Secondary part

U-groove weld (single-Ubutt weld)

7 Both parts

J-groove weld (single-J buttweld)

8 Secondary part

Flare V-groove weld 16 Both parts

Flare-bevel-groove weld 15 Secondary part

Edge-flange weld 1 No

Corner-flange weld 17 No

Plug weld 11 No

Bevel backing weld 9 No

Spot weld 12 No

Seam weld 13 No

Page 232: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 232/260

 

232 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

Corner chamfer properties

Use the Chamfer Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a corner chamfer.

See also Chamfering part corners(p. 105)

Edge chamfer properties

Use the Edge Chamfer Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of an edgechamfer.

Slot weld 14 No

Partial penetration weld

(single-bevel butt + fillet)

18 Secondary part

Partial penetration weld(square groove + fillet)

19 No

Melt-through weld 20 No

Steep-flanked single-V buttweld

21 No

Steep-flanked single-bevelbutt weld

22 No

Edge weld 23 No

Surfacing weld 24 No

Fold joint 25 No

Inclined joint 26 No

Weldtype Name Number Preparation

Option

Type The shape of the chamfer.

x The dimensions of the chamfer. The dimension depends on thechamfer type.

y

dz1 Only used for contour plates and concrete slabs.

Moves the top or bottom surface of the part corner in the part’slocal z direction.

Use these fields, for example, to give plates varyingthicknesses.

dz2

Field Description More information

Type The shape of the chamfer.

Name The name of the chamfer.

Page 233: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 233/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 233

Modeling Settings

See also Chamfering part edges (p. 107)

8.5 Numbering sett ings

This section provides more information about specific numbering settings.

See also General numbering settings (p. 233)

Weld numbering settings (p. 234)

Control number settings (p. 235)

General numbering settings

Use the Numbering Setup dialog box to view and modify some general numbering settings.

Cutting distance

in X direction

Defines how far away from thechamfered edge the chamfer willend in the x direction.

Cutting distance

in Y direction

Defines how far away from the

chamfered edge the chamfer willend in the y direction.

First end type The shape and position of thefirst end point.

The options are:

• Full: The end point is

positioned at the end of thepart (moving along thenearest edge), and the shapeis straight.

• Straight: The end point is

positioned at the point youpick, and the shape isstraight.

• Bevelled: The end point ispositioned at the point youpick, and the shape is angled.

Second end type The shape and position of thesecond end point.

Dimension The distance between the(picked) end point and thebevelled points.

Field Description More information

Option

Renumber all All parts get a new number. All information on previousnumbers is lost.

Re-use old numbers Tekla Structures reuses the numbers of parts that have beendeleted. These numbers may be used to number new ormodified parts.

Page 234: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 234/260

 

234 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Creating a standard-part model (p. 160)

Weld numbering settingsUse the Weld Numbering dialog box to view and modify the weld numbering settings. Theweld number is displayed in drawings and weld reports.

Check for standard parts If a separate standard-part model has been set up, TeklaStructures compares the parts in the current model to those inthe standard-part model.

If the part to be numbered is identical to a part in the standard-

part model, Tekla Structures uses the same part number as inthe standard-part model.

Compare to old The part gets the same number as a previously numberedsimilar part.

Take new number The part gets a new number even if a similar numbered partalready exists.

Keep number if possible Modified parts maintain their previous numbers if possible.

Synchronize with master

model

Use this setting when working in multi-user mode. TeklaStructures locks the master model and performs a save,numbering, and save sequence, so that all other users cancontinue working during the operation.

Automatic cloning If the main part of a drawing is modified and therefore gets anew assembly position, the existing drawing is automaticallyassigned to another part of the position.

If the modified part moves to an assembly position that doesnot have a drawing, the original drawing is automaticallycloned to reflect the changes in the modified part.

Holes The location, size, and number of holes affects numbering.

Part name The part name affects numbering.

Beam orientation The orientation of beams affects numbering.

Column orientation The orientation of columns affects numbering.

Reinforcing bars The orientation of reinforcing bars affects numbering.

Embedded objects The orientation of equal embedded objects affects numbering.

Surface treatment Surface treatments affect the numbering of assemblies.

Tolerance Parts can get the same number if they do not differ more thanas set in this input field.

Assembly position sort

order

See Assembly position numbers (p. 157).

Option

Page 235: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 235/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 235

Modeling Settings

See also Numbering objects (p. 156)

Control number settings

Use the Create control numbers (S9) dialog box to view and modify the control numbersettings.

See also Control numbers (p. 158)

Option

Start number The number from which the numberingstarts. Tekla Structures automaticallysuggests the following free number as the

start number.Apply for Defines which objects are affected by the

change.

All welds changes the number of all welds inthe model.

Selected welds changes the number of theselected welds without affecting others.

Renumber also welds that have a number Tekla Structures replaces existing weldnumbers.

Re-use numbers of deleted welds If some welds have been removed, TeklaStructures uses their numbers when

numbering other welds.

Option

Numbering Defines which parts get control numbers.All creates consecutive numbers for all parts.

By numbering series creates controlnumbers for parts in a specific numberingseries.

Assembly/Cast unit numbering series Defines the prefix and start number of thenumbering series for which to create controlnumbers.

Needed only with the By numbering series option.

Start number of control numbers The number from which the numberingstarts.

Step value Defines the interval between two controlnumbers.

Renumber Defines how to treat parts that already havecontrol numbers.

Yes replaces the existing control numbers.

No keeps the existing control numbers.

First direction Defines in what order to assign controlnumbers.

Second direction

Third direction

Page 236: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 236/260

 

236 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Settings

Page 237: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 237/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 237

Modeling Tips

9 Modeling Tips

This section provides useful hints and tips that help you to model structures more quickly andaccurately, and avoid potential problems with templates and drawings.

Contents • General modeling tips (p. 237)

• Part positioning tips (p. 241)

9.1 General modeling t ips

These tips will help you to use some basic modeling functionalities more efficiently.

See also Defining default part properties (p. 237)

Copying and moving efficiently (p. 238)

Modeling identical areas (p. 238)

Selecting values from the model (p. 238)

Activating an overlapping view (p. 239)

Finding RGB values for colors (p. 239)

Right-hand rule (p. 239)

Hiding cut lines in a view (p. 240)

Cutting efficiently (p. 240)

Useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports (p. 241)

Defining default part properties

Save time by saving a default set of properties for each part you plan to create before you startmodeling.

To define default sets of part properties for a project:

1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.

2. Enter the part properties you want to use as defaults.

Page 238: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 238/260

 

238 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Tips

3. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the set of properties. Forexample, enter BEAM.

4. Click  Save as to save the set of properties.

5. Click  OK to close the part properties dialog box.

6. Continue to save sets of properties for each type of part you intend to create.

7. To make the sets of part properties you have defined the default sets for this project,

click  Tools > Defaults > Save Defaults.

Copying and moving efficiently

You can keep the Move and Copy dialog boxes open if you are going to use them often, for

example, when creating grids and levels in a new model.To keep a dialog box open while modeling:

1. Start the Move or Copy command.

2. To stop copying or moving objects, right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-upmenu.

The dialog box remains open on the screen.

3. To continue copying or moving objects:

a Click the dialog box to activate it.

b Select an object.

c Enter the values you want to use, and then click the Move or Copy button in thedialog box.

See also Copying and moving objects

Modeling identical areas

Most structures contain identical areas, from simple frames to entire floors. Save time bymodeling these areas once, then copying them throughout the model. For example, create acolumn with a base plate and cap plate, then copy the column to all the locations where itoccurs in the model.

You can use this technique to create and reproduce any identical area. Depending on theproject, you may even be able to add connections before copying the area of the building.

See also Copying and moving objects

Selecting values from the model

You can select object properties and dates directly from the model. This can useful whencreating view filters, selection filters, and object groups.

Before you start, create an empty view or selection filter, or an object group.

To use a default set of part properties, open the part properties dialog boxand select an option from the list next to the Load button. Click Load toload the properties.

For a project that has several identical floors, try modeling an entirefloor, then copying it to several levels.

Page 239: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 239/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 239

Modeling Tips

To select values from the model:

1. Click  Add row.

2. Select options from the Category and Property list boxes.

3. In the Value list box, select one of the options.

The availability of options depends on your selection in the Property list box. You canselect dates from the model only if the property is a date.

a To select an object property, click Select from model... and then select an object.

b To select a date, click  Select date... to open the Select date dialog box, and thenselect one of the options.

You can either select a date from the calendar, select the review date, or define thenumber of days before or after the review date. The review date is the same asReview date in the Project Status Visualization dialog box.

See also Creating a view filter

Creating a selection filter

Creating an object group (p. 132)

Creating a visualization (p. 136)

 Activating an overlapping view

When you want to pick positions from two views that partly overlap, you can use the Xmouse option. With Xmouse active, simply moving the mouse pointer over a view activates the view.

To activate a view using Xmouse:

1. Click  Tools > Options > Xmouse to switch on Xmouse.

A check mark appears next to the menu option if Xmouse is already switched on.

2. To activate a view, do one of the following:

• Move the mouse pointer over the view.

• Use the Page Up, Page Down and arrow keys.

See also Views (p. 33)

Finding RGB values for colors

To find RGB values for colors:

1. Log in to the Tekla Extranet.

2. Click  Tekla Structures > Self learning > Questions and answers.

3. Open the Background color in model editor document.

4. Download and install the application.

Right-hand rule

Right-hand rule indicates the direction of the coordinate axes. When you hold the thumb, indexfinger, and middle finger of your right hand so that they form three right angles, then the thumbsymbolizes the x axis, the index finger the y axis, and the middle finger the z axis.

Page 240: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 240/260

 

240 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Tips

Hiding cut lines in a view

To hide all cut lines in a view:

1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.

2. Click  Display... to open the Display dialog box.

3. Clear the Cuts check box.

4. Click  Modify.

See also Cuts (p. 109)

Cutting efficiently

Follow these guidelines when cutting objects in the model:

• Avoid part faces

Avoid creating cuts that are exactly on the part planes or go through vertices. Try toposition the cut at least 0.3 mm outside of the part planes.

• Use polygon cutsWhenever possible, use polygon cuts. The Cut part with polygon command automaticallyextends the cut slightly outside of the part face. Note that after creating the polygon, youmay have to adjust the position of the handles manually.

• Use edge chamfers

Whenever possible, use edge chamfers instead of small cuts, especially in components.

• Tips for flange cuts

When cutting a flange, if the cutting part cuts very slightly the web as well (at least 0.3mm), the cut is more likely to succeed. For example, if you are cutting a beam that hasroundings, it may be useful to cut even further onto the web than just the flange thickness.

• Tips for round tube cuts

Use the Round tube (23) component for round tube cuts. The component automaticallyrotates the cutting part until a successful cut position is found. If the component fails,rotate the cutting part slightly until you find a successful cut position.

See also Cuts (p. 109)

If a cut fails, Tekla Structures displays the cutting part using dash-and-dot lines. An error notification is printed in the session history log statingwhich part and which cut caused the failure.

To locate the failure in the model, click a row that contains an IDnumber in the session history log. Tekla Structures selects thecorresponding part and cut in the model.

Page 241: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 241/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 241

Modeling Tips

Viewing log files

Useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports (p. 241)

Useful shor tcuts in v iewing logs and reports

Use the following shortcuts when viewing items in log files and reports:

See also Viewing log files

Viewing reports

9.2 Part posi tioning tips

These tips will help you to efficiently create and position parts in a view.

See also Modifying part length (p. 241)

Creating horizontal parts (p. 242)

Optional ways of placing objects in a model (p. 242)

Positioning objects in a radial or circular pattern (p. 242)

Modifying part length

To modify the length of a part, do one of the following:

• To shorten a part, move the part handles, or use the Fit Part End command.

• To lengthen a part, move the part handles.

To Do this

Zoom to the selected objects 1. Hold down Z.

2. Click a row that contains an ID number.

Tekla Structures zooms to the correspondingobjects in the active model view.

Fit the work area to include onlythe selected objects

1. Hold down F.

2. Click a row that contains an ID number.

Tekla Structures zooms to the corresponding

objects in the active model view.

Do not cut the end of a part to shorten it. This can cause shop errors,because cuts do not always affect part length when you exportinformation to NC files.

Do not use fittings to lengthen parts. It can cause problems withconnections and details.

Page 242: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 242/260

 

242 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Modeling Tips

See also Part position (p. 57)

Fittings (p. 108)

Creating hor izontal parts

When creating horizontal parts, such as beams, always pick points in the same direction. Forexample, pick positions from left to right, and from bottom to top (in positive x, y directions).This ensures that Tekla Structures places and dimensions the parts in the same way in drawings,and that part marks automatically appear at the same part end.

To ensure that beam rotation is correct in drawings, set part Rotation to Top in the partproperties dialog box.

Optional ways of placing objects in a model

When you want to place an object to a position where no lines or objects intersect, you have thefollowing options:

• Use the snapping commands.• Use construction planes, lines and circles.

• Create points.

See also Snapping to positions

Construction objects (p. 40)

Points (p. 42)

Positioning objects in a radial or circular pattern

To position objects in a radial or circular pattern, do one of the following:

• Create a grid line and use the Copy Special > Rotate command to copy it.

• Use construction lines and circles to position the objects.

See also Creating a single grid line (p. 32)

Rotating objects

Construction objects (p. 40)

Page 243: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 243/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 243

Index

#

3D

models...................................................................15views.....................................................................39

4D tool, see visualizing project status........................135

aabsolute coordinates....................................................30

angle dimensions....................................................... 191angles.........................................................................143

arcs.............................................................................185assemblies ...................................................................70

adding objects.................................................73, 74

changing the main assembly.................................75

changing the main part..........................................75

comparing...........................................................149creating.................................................................71examples...............................................................76exploding...............................................................76

highlighting............................................................75

 joining....................................................................75lotting...................................................................174

nested assemblies..........................................73, 74numbering...........................................................157

removing objects...................................................75showing and hiding............................................. 131

sub-assemblies.....................................................71using bolts to create assemblies...........................71

using welds to create assemblies......................... 72attaching parts............................................................117

b

background color 

changing................................................................23

examples...............................................................23

beams

cambering............................................................ 115concrete beams............................................ 79, 225

concrete polybeams..............................................79curved beams........................................................68

orthogonal beams..................................................69steel beams.................................................. 67, 218

steel polybeams ....................................................67warping................................................................113

bending.........................................................................65bolts...............................................................71, 85, 227

bolt group position.................................................87

bolt group shape....................................................86bolt offsets.............................................................88bolt spacing.........................................................143

bolting sub-assemblies..........................................72clash checking.....................................................148

creating...........................................................86, 88

modifying...............................................................88

c

cambering parts..........................................................115cast in place..................................................................83

cast units......................................................................81adding non-concrete objects.................................82

adding objects.......................................................82

cast unit type.........................................................83casting direction....................................................84changing the main part..........................................82

creating..................................................................82exploding...............................................................83

highlighting............................................................83

lotting...................................................................174numbering ...........................................................157removing objects...................................................83

top-in-form face.....................................................84chamfering..................................................................104

corner chamfer dimensions.................................105

corner chamfer types...........................................105corner chamfers..................................................105

edge chamfers.....................................................107in sketches ..........................................................199

Page 244: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 244/260

 

244 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

checkingsketched cross sections......................................197

checking the model.....................................................142circles..........................................................................185

Clash Check Manager....................................... 145, 146clash checking.................................. 144, 145, 146, 149

bolts.....................................................................148changing priority..................................................147

changing status...................................................147list of clashes.......................................................146

managing results.................................................146sessions...............................................................147

symbols...............................................................146class.......................................................................51, 55

classifying information................................................167clip planes...................................................................124

coincident contraints...................................................187

colliding objects..........................................................144colors............................................................................55

background color...................................................23

background color examples...................................23color settings.......................................................213

finding RGB values..............................................239grid color.........................................................28, 31

columnsconcrete columns......................................... 78, 224

steel columns................................................ 66, 218combining parts ................................................. 116, 117

comparing parts or assemblies...................................149components

showing and hiding..............................................132

concrete parts...............................................................77beams........................................................... 79, 225

cast units................................................................81casting direction.....................................................84

columns........................................................78, 224pad footings..................................................78, 222

panels...........................................................81, 226polybeams.............................................................79

slabs.............................................................80, 225strip footings.................................................78, 223

warping................................................................113constraints...................................................................186

coincident.............................................................187deleting................................................................189

fixed.....................................................................188horizontal .............................................................188

parallel.................................................................186

perpendicular....................................................... 187vertical .................................................................189

construction objects......................................................40

construction circles................................................41construction lines...................................................41

construction planes................................................40contour plates................................................68, 69, 219

control numbers.................................................158, 159settings................................................................235

coordinatescoordinate system..................................................28

copyinghints and tips........................................................238

object groups.......................................................133object representation settings..............................135

project status visualizations.................................136corner chamfers.........................................104, 105, 232

types and dimensions..........................................105

Page 245: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 245/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 245

creatingassemblies......................................................70, 71

bolts.......................................................................86cast units...............................................................82

clip planes...........................................................124concrete beams.....................................................79

concrete columns..................................................78concrete panels.....................................................81

concrete polybeams..............................................79concrete slabs.......................................................80

construction circles................................................41construction lines.................................................. 41

construction planes...............................................40contour plates..................................................68, 69

curved beams........................................................68fittings..................................................................108

grid lines................................................................32

grid views..............................................................38grids......................................................................30holes................................................................89, 90

logical areas........................................................168lots.......................................................................174

models...................................................................16nested assemblies ................................................74

object groups.......................................................132object representation settings.............................134

object type categories.........................................169orthogonal beams................................................. 69

pad footings...........................................................78project status visualizations................................ 136

screenshots......................................................... 124sections...............................................................168

sequences........................................................... 172single bolts............................................................88

sketched cross sections...................................... 184slabs......................................................................80

standard-part models.......................................... 160steel beams...........................................................67

steel columns........................................................66steel polybeams....................................................67

storys...................................................................168strip footings..........................................................78sub-assemblies.....................................................71tile patterns..........................................................100

twin profiles...........................................................70views.....................................................................35

welds........................................................91, 93, 94

cross sectionscross section sketch editor..................................181sketching cross sections..................................... 181

curved parts............................................................65, 68

Custom Inquiry ...........................................................126adding attributes..................................................127

modifying contents..............................................127cuts.............................................................................109

hints and tips.......................................................240line cuts...................................................... 109, 111

part cuts...................................................... 110, 112polygon cuts............................................... 109, 111

d

deleting

logical areas........................................................171

object types.........................................................171detail properties..........................................................227

DGNsupported objects..................................................48

dimensions

angle....................................................................191

between two points..............................................191deleting from a sketch.........................................193

horizontal.............................................................192in sketching .........................................................190radial....................................................................190

vertical .................................................................192

display settings...........................................................216distances

measuring............................................................ 143dividing models...........................................................171

e

edge chamfers...........................................104, 107, 232

end offsets....................................................................63

erection schedules............................................. 137, 139erection sequences ....................................................171

exact lines...................................................................131

examining the model ..................................................119examples

assemblies ............................................................76

background colors.................................................23creating object groups.........................................137

creating object representation settings................138creating project status visualization settings.......138

creating symmetric C-shaped cross section........204defining erection schedules.................................137

numbering..................................162, 163, 164, 165tile pattern definition............................................101

visualizing erection schedules.............................139visualizing project status.....................................136

Page 246: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 246/260

 

246 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

explodingassemblies............................................................. 76

cast units...............................................................83exporting

sketched cross sections......................................203extrusion types............................................................200

family numbers...........................................................155example...............................................................163modifying.............................................................156

finding

clashes................................................................145finding distant objects.................................................149

fittings.........................................................................108fixed constraints..........................................................188flying through model...................................................123

footings........................................................78, 222, 223

g

global coordinate system..............................................28grid lines.......................................................................32

creating..................................................................32deleting..................................................................33

modifying...............................................................33properties.............................................................212

grid viewscreating..................................................................38

properties.............................................................215grids

coordinates............................................................30

creating..................................................................30

deleting..................................................................31grid color.........................................................28, 31

labels..............................................................29, 31

line extensions.......................................................29modifying...............................................................31origin......................................................................29

properties.............................................................211work plane grid......................................................27

h

handles.........................................................................57

moving...................................................................57

of positioning planes............................................196

hidingassemblies........................................................... 131

components......................................................... 132cut lines................................................................240

grid labels..............................................................31part labels..............................................................56

positioning planes................................................195reference lines.......................................................58

reference models...................................................45selected parts......................................................130

top-in-form face......................................................84unselected parts ..................................................131

work area...............................................................26highlighting

assemblies............................................................. 75cast units................................................................83

reference models...................................................45

hints and tips, see tips................................................237holes......................................................................89, 90horizontal constraints..................................................188

horizontal dimensions.................................................192horizontal position.........................................................62

i

identicalareas....................................................................238

parts.....................................................................152reinforcements..................................................... 153

importing

points.....................................................................42

sketched cross sections.......................................203inquiring

models.................................................................126object properties..................................................126

 j

  joining assemblies.........................................................75

l

lengthening parts ........................................................116

levels.............................................................................64line cuts..............................................................109, 111lines

exact ....................................................................131

local coordinate system................................................28

Page 247: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 247/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 247

log filesviewing................................................................241

logical areas.......................................................167, 168viewing................................................................170

lotting..........................................................................174adding parts........................................................175

creating...............................................................174deleting................................................................175

removing.............................................................175

m

Magnifier.....................................................................120

materials.......................................................................54measuring objects......................................................143

angles..................................................................143bolt spacing.........................................................143distances.............................................................143

Mini Toolbar 

modifying part position..........................................58Model Editor 

screen layout.........................................................21Model Organizer.........................................................167modeling

hints and tips.......................................................237

identical areas.....................................................238parametric modeling............................................ 176

rendered or plan view?..........................................34Modeling of floor bay (66)...........................................114models

about 3D models...................................................15

checking for errors ..............................................142creating.................................................................16

dividing into phases.............................................171examining............................................................119flying through model............................................123

inquiring...............................................................126

moving.................................................................122numbering...........................................................151

organizing............................................................167rotating................................................................121

saving....................................................................17viewing................................................................119

zooming...............................................................119modifying

logical areas........................................................169object types.........................................................169

movinghints and tips.......................................................238

models in a view..................................................122positioning planes................................................195

using handles........................................................57

n

nested assemblies................................................. 73, 74

numbering.......................................................... 151, 156about numbering.................................................151assemblies ..........................................................157

cast units.............................................................157

checking and repairing........................................161clearing................................................................160

control numbers.......................................... 158, 159examples.................................... 162, 163, 164, 165family numbers...................................155, 156, 163

history..................................................................161

identical parts......................................................152identical reinforcements ......................................153

modifying.............................................................159numbering series.................................................154preliminary numbers............................................158

reinforcements..................................................... 157

sequences...........................................................172series..................................................153, 154, 156

settings...............................................233, 234, 235standard-part model............................................160user-defined attributes.........................................153

what affects.........................................................152

numbering settings.....................................................233

o

object groups..............................................................132

color settings.......................................................213

copying to another model....................................133creating................................................................132deleting................................................................133

example...............................................................137transparency settings..........................................214

object property report templates.................................126object representation settings.....................................133

copying................................................................135creating................................................................134

deleting................................................................135example...............................................................138

object types................................................................167viewing................................................................170

Page 248: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 248/260

 

248 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

objectsclash checking............................................ 144, 145

defining visibility...................................................128finding distant objects..........................................149

inquiring properties..............................................126measuring............................................................ 143

numbering............................................................ 156placing objects in model......................................242

positioning...........................................................242showing and hiding..............................................128

offsets...........................................................................63opening

models...................................................................17organizing the model ..................................................167

orthogonal beams.......................................................220overlapping

numbering series.................................................156

views....................................................................239oversized holes.............................................................90

p

pad footings......................................................... 78, 222panels...........................................................................81

panning.......................................................................122

parallel constraints......................................................186parametric modeling...................................................176

profiles.................................................................176parametric profiles........................................................53part add, see attaching parts......................................117

part labels.....................................................................56

showing and hiding................................................56part properties.............................................................217

partsadding to assembly................................................74

assemblies............................................................. 70bending..................................................................65

cambering............................................................115changing the material ............................................54

changing the profile ...............................................52combining............................................................116

comparing............................................................149concrete parts........................................................77

cutting with another part .............................110, 112default properties.................................................237

hiding...................................................................130horizontal parts....................................................242

identical parts.......................................................152labels.....................................................................56

lengthening..........................................................115

lengthening in drawings.......................................116lotting...................................................................174material..................................................................54

modifying part length...........................................241numbering................................................... 154, 156

part types...............................................................52position...........................................................57, 58

profiles...................................................................52properties...............................................................51

sequences..................................................172, 173shortening............................................................115

shortening in drawings.........................................116showing only selected parts.................................131

showing with exact lines......................................131splitting.................................................................117

steel parts..............................................................66user-defined attributes...........................................55

warping................................................................113perpendicular constraints............................................187

phases........................................................................171in numbering........................................................164

plane views...................................................................39points............................................................................42

coordinates..........................................................212importing................................................................42phase and ID.......................................................212properties.............................................................212

polybeams.............................................................. 67, 79polygon cuts.......................................................109, 111

polygon shapes...........................................................112

polygon welds...............................................................93polylines......................................................................184

Page 249: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 249/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 249

positionbending.................................................................65

depth.....................................................................60end offsets.............................................................63

horizontal...............................................................62levels.....................................................................64

on the work plane..................................................59rotation..................................................................59

vertical...................................................................61positioning planes.......................................................193

handles................................................................196moving.................................................................195

reverting to default ..............................................197prefixes

profile name prefixes.............................................53weld size prefix......................................................93

preliminary numbers...................................................158

preparing parts for welding...........................................94printing

screenshots......................................................... 125

priorityin clash checking.................................................147

profiles..........................................................................52parametric.....................................................53, 176

prefixes..................................................................53separators.............................................................53

sketched profiles................................................. 201standard................................................................53

twin profiles...........................................................70user-defined..........................................................53

project status visualizations........................................135copying................................................................136

creating...............................................................136deleting................................................................136

example....................................................... 136, 138properties

default .................................................................237

radial dimensions....................................................... 190

radius............................................................................65redrawing views............................................................39

reference lines........................................................57, 58reference model objects...............................................47

selecting................................................................48

reference models..........................................................43clash checking.....................................................144

hiding.....................................................................45highlighting............................................................45

inserting.................................................................44modifying properties..............................................44

selecting................................................................45splitting into reference objects...............................48

supported DGN objects.........................................48updating.................................................................45

viewing changes....................................................45viewing layers........................................................46

reference points............................................................57refreshing views............................................................39

reinforcementsidentical...............................................................153

numbering ...........................................................157

relative coordinates......................................................30rendered views.............................................................36

representation options.........................................128

repairingnumbering errors.................................................161

report templatesfor inquiring object properties..............................126

reportsviewing................................................................241

representation options................................................128restoring default work plane.........................................28

revertingto default positioning planes................................197

to old clash checking functionality.......................149RGB values ................................................................239

right-hand rule ............................................................239rotating

models.................................................................121parts ......................................................................59

rotation settings...................................................213rotation angle knob.......................................................58

roundholes......................................................................89

plates.....................................................................69slabs......................................................................80

s

savingmodels...................................................................17

sketched cross sections......................................198screen layout

in Model Editor ......................................................21

Page 250: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 250/260

 

250 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

screenshotscreating................................................................124

in Windows Vista.................................................125printing.................................................................125

saving in bitmap format.......................................125settings................................................................214

sections.......................................................................168selecting

dates from model.................................................238reference model objects........................................48

reference models...................................................45values from model...............................................238

selection dial.................................................................58sequences..................................................................172

adding parts.........................................................173creating................................................................172

deleting................................................................173

inquiring...............................................................173modifying.............................................................173

settings

bolt properties......................................................227concrete beam properties....................................225

concrete column properties.................................224concrete panel properties....................................226

concrete slab properties......................................225contour plate properties.......................................219

corner chamfer properties...................................232detail properties...................................................227

display settings....................................................216edge chamfer properties......................................232

general modeling settings....................................211grid line properties...............................................212

grid properties......................................................211grid view properties.............................................215

numbering settings.............................233, 234, 235orthogonal beam properties.................................220

pad footing properties..........................................222part properties.....................................................217

point properties....................................................212rotation settings...................................................213

screenshot settings..............................................214steel beam properties..........................................218steel column properties.......................................218strip footing properties.........................................223

twin profile properties..........................................221view properties....................................................215

view settings........................................................215

weld properties....................................................229shifting the work plane..................................................27shortcuts

in viewing logs and reports..................................241

shortening and lengthening parts...............................115

shortening parts in drawings.......................................116showing

assemblies........................................................... 131components......................................................... 132

cut lines................................................................240parts labels............................................................56

parts with exact lines...........................................131positioning planes................................................195

reference lines.......................................................58top-in-form face......................................................84

views......................................................................38work area...............................................................26

single bolts....................................................................88single grid lines.............................................................32

single-part welds...........................................................94Sketch Browser...........................................................182

sketch editor................................................................181

sketched cross sections..............................................181adding constraints................................................186adding dimensions...............................................190

arcs......................................................................185chamfers..............................................................199

checking...............................................................197circles...................................................................185

creating................................................................184creating images...................................................201

example...............................................................204exporting.....................................................202, 203

extrusion types.....................................................200importing.....................................................202, 203

modifying.............................................................198polylines...............................................................184

positioning planes...............................193, 194, 196profiles.................................................................201

refining the shape................................................186saving..................................................................198

sketch thickness..................................................199using in models....................................................201

variables..............................................................183slabs..............................................................................80

warping.......................................................113, 114slotted holes..................................................................90snapping

to middle points......................................................57

snapshots, see screenshots .......................................124splitting

parts............................................................117, 118

plates and slabs...................................................118standard profiles...........................................................53standard-part models..................................................160

status

in clash checking.................................................147

Page 251: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 251/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 251

steel parts.....................................................................66assemblies............................................................70

beams...........................................................67, 218columns.........................................................66, 218

contour plates.........................................68, 69, 219curved beams........................................................68

orthogonal beams.........................................69, 220polybeams............................................................. 67

twin profiles...................................................70, 221storys..........................................................................168

strip footings.........................................................78, 223sub-assemblies ............................................................71

bolting to existing assembly..................................72welding to existing assembly.................................72

surface treatment .........................................................95adding...................................................................96

creating new surface treatments...........................99

modifying...............................................................96on all faces of part.................................................97on chamfered parts...............................................98

on cut faces...........................................................97on part face...........................................................97

on parts with openings and recesses....................98on selected areas..................................................97

tiled surface treatment...................................96, 100switching between

views.....................................................................39

ttesting

sketched cross sections...................................... 197tiled surface treatment................................................100

creating new tile patterns.................................... 100pattern definition example...................................101pattern definitions................................................103

pattern elements ................................................. 104

tipsactivating overlapping views............................... 239

copying and moving efficiently............................238creating horizontal parts......................................242

cutting efficiently..................................................240defining default part properties............................237

finding RGB values for colors..............................239modeling identical areas..................................... 238

modifying part length...........................................241placing objects....................................................242

positioning objects in radial or circular pattern....242right-hand rule.....................................................239

selecting values from model................................238

useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports .......241

top-in-form face ............................................................84transparency settings.................................................214

twin profiles.......................................................... 70, 221

u

user interface

in Model Editor ......................................................21user-defined attributes..................................................55

in numbering........................................................153user-defined profiles.....................................................53

v

valuesselecting from model...........................................238

variablesin parametric modeling........................................176

in sketching.........................................................183vertical constraints......................................................189vertical dimensions.....................................................192

vertical position.............................................................61

view depth..................................................................128view planes...................................................................36

moving...................................................................37view settings...............................................................215

viewinglogical areas........................................................170

models........................................................ 119, 124numbering history................................................161

object types.........................................................170sequence numbers..............................................173

views.............................................................................33

arranging...............................................................39

closing...................................................................39creating..................................................................35

deleting..................................................................38

modifying...............................................................38naming...................................................................35opening..................................................................38

overlapping..........................................................239properties............................................................215

refreshing..............................................................39switching between views.......................................39

temporary..............................................................35view planes............................................................36

view types..............................................................36visibility of objects.......................................................128

visualizing project status.............................................136

Page 252: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 252/260

 

252 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

w

warpingbeams..................................................................113

concrete parts......................................................113concrete slabs............................................ 113, 114welds....................................................................91, 229

between parts........................................................91

creating.....................................................91, 93, 94numbering............................................................ 234

polygon welds........................................................93single-part welds....................................................94weld position..........................................................92

weld preparation....................................................94

weld size prefixes..................................................93weld types............................................................231

welding sub-assemblies........................................72wire frame views...........................................................36

work area.............................................................25, 128defining..................................................................26

hiding.....................................................................26work plane.....................................................................27

restoring.................................................................28shifting...................................................................27

workspacein Model Editor.......................................................21

z

zooming

using Magnifier....................................................120

with keyboard shortcuts.......................................120zoom settings.......................................................120

zoom window.......................................................120zooming in or out ........................................................119

Page 253: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 253/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 253

Page 254: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 254/260

 

254 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Page 255: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 255/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 255

Page 256: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 256/260

 

256 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Page 257: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 257/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 257

Page 258: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 258/260

 

258 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16

Page 259: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 259/260

 

TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 259

Page 260: 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu

5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 260/260